VisualField Software

Function Block

Reference
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Section 1 Overview.......................................................................................................................1

1.1 Work Mode of Function Block............................................................................................1

1.1.1 OOS (Out of Service) ..............................................................................................1
1.1.2 Initial Status (IMAN).................................................................................................1
1.1.3 Track (TR) ...............................................................................................................2
1.1.4 Manual (MAN) .........................................................................................................2
1.1.5 Auto (AUTO)............................................................................................................2
1.1.6 Cascade (CAS) .......................................................................................................2
1.2 Active/Inactive ...................................................................................................................2
1.3 Data Type ..........................................................................................................................3
1.4 Parameter Sort of Function Block......................................................................................3
1.5 Function Block Panel.........................................................................................................4
1.5.1 Fixed Button ............................................................................................................5
1.5.2 Close Button............................................................................................................5
1.5.3 FB Tag Name ..........................................................................................................5
1.5.4 Selected, Alarm, ACK ..............................................................................................6
1.5.5 Detailed Information of Alarm ..................................................................................6
1.5.6 Analog Data Area ....................................................................................................6
1.5.7 Basic Operation Area ..............................................................................................6
1.5.8 Digital Button or Analog Bar Diagram Display Area.................................................6
1.5.9 Auxiliary Operation Area..........................................................................................7
1.5.10 Switchover Button Area .........................................................................................7
1.5.11 Tag Description ......................................................................................................8
1.5.12 Operation Authority of Panel .................................................................................8
1.5.13 Operator Keyboard Operation ...............................................................................8
1.5.14 Function Block Panel Example..............................................................................8

Section 2 Control Function Block Library ................................................................................14

2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block.........................................................................14

2.1.1 Mode And Parameter Status (MODE) ...................................................................14
2.1.2 Input Process ........................................................................................................17
2.1.3 Set Variable Process .............................................................................................19
2.1.4 Operation Process.................................................................................................20

1
 Table of Contents

2.1.5 Output Process......................................................................................................26

2.1.6 Alarm .....................................................................................................................27
2.1.7 Others ...................................................................................................................31
2.1.8 PID Parameter Tune..............................................................................................32
2.1.9 Difference between Various PID Function Blocks .................................................35
2.2 General PID Function Block (PID) ...................................................................................35
2.2.1 Parameter Instruction ............................................................................................36
2.2.2 Function Block Panel Parameter ...........................................................................47
2.2.3 Flag .......................................................................................................................52
2.2.4 Application Example ..............................................................................................53
2.3 PIDEP Function Block (PIDEP) .......................................................................................59
2.3.1 Parameter Instruction ............................................................................................59
2.3.2 Function Block Panel Parameter ...........................................................................69
2.3.3 Flag .......................................................................................................................72
2.3.4 Application Example ..............................................................................................73
2.4 Extended PID Control Function Block (PIDEX) ...............................................................74
2.4.1 Parameters Instruction ..........................................................................................75
2.4.2 Function Block Panel Parameter ...........................................................................85
2.4.3 Flag .......................................................................................................................90
2.4.4 Application Example ..............................................................................................91
2.5 EPID Control Function Block (EPID) ...............................................................................96
2.5.1 Parameters Instruction ..........................................................................................96
2.5.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................100
2.5.3 Application Example ............................................................................................102
2.6 LEPID Function Block (LEPID)......................................................................................103
2.6.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................103
2.6.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................108
2.6.3 Flag ..................................................................................................................... 110
2.6.4 Application Example ............................................................................................ 110
2.7 PID for Pulse Output Function Block (PID_TP) ............................................................. 110
2.7.1 Parameter Instruction .......................................................................................... 111
2.7.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................121
2.7.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................125
2.8 Pulse PI Control Function Block (PI_PLS).....................................................................126
2.8.1 Parameter Description.........................................................................................126
2.8.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................137
2.8.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................141

2
 Table of Contents

2.9 Integral of Manual Set PD Function Block (PD_SI) .......................................................142

2.9.1 Parameter Description.........................................................................................142
2.9.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................152
2.9.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................156
2.10 Error Cumulation PI Control Function Block (PI_AE)...................................................157
2.10.1 Parameter Description.......................................................................................157
2.10.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................169
2.10.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................173
2.11 Ratio Control Function Block (RATIO) .........................................................................174
2.11.1 Parameter Description .......................................................................................174
2.11.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................181
2.11.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................183
2.11.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................184
2.12 Split Control Function Block (SPLIT) ...........................................................................187
2.12.1 Parameter Description.......................................................................................187
2.12.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................194
2.12.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................196
2.12.4 Application Example1 ........................................................................................197
2.12.5 Application Example 2 .......................................................................................199
2.13 Handheld Function Block (MANUAL) ..........................................................................204
2.13.1 Parameters Instruction ......................................................................................205
2.13.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................210
2.13.3 Flag ................................................................................................................... 211
2.13.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................212
2.14 Electric Manual Operation Function Block (MANUAL_EP)..........................................213
2.14.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................214
2.14.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................221
2.14.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................223
2.14.4 Example ............................................................................................................224
2.15 Maximum Selection Function Block (ASH) ..................................................................226
2.15.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................226
2.15.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................230
2.15.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................231
2.16 Minimum Selection Function Block (ASL)....................................................................232
2.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................232
2.16.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................236
2.16.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................237

3
 Table of Contents

2.16.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................237

2.17 Signal Distribution Function Block (FOUT) ..................................................................240
2.17.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................240
2.17.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................248
2.17.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................251
2.17.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................251

Section 3 Logical Control Function Block Library ................................................................254

3.1 Software Pulse Sequence Output Function Block (SPO) ..............................................254

3.2 Digital Status Change Function Block (DSCA) ..............................................................256
3.2.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................256
3.2.2 Application Example ............................................................................................257
3.3 Switch Status Time Accumulation Function Block (SSTA) .............................................258
3.3.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................258
3.3.2 Application Example ............................................................................................260
3.4 Eight Input QOR Function Block (QOR_8) ....................................................................261
3.4.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................261
3.4.2 Application Example ............................................................................................262
3.5 Digital First SN Indicator Function Block (FIRST)..........................................................263
3.6 Blink Function Block (BLINK) ........................................................................................265
3.7 Interval Control Function Block (DGAP) ........................................................................266
3.7.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................266
3.7.2 Parameters Description of Panel.........................................................................272
3.7.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................273
3.8 Pulse Position Function Block (PULPOS) .....................................................................274
3.8.1 Logic Time Sequencing .......................................................................................275
3.9 Motor Control Function Block (MOTOR)........................................................................276
3.9.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................276
3.9.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ................................................................................285
3.9.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................286
3.9.4 Example Application ............................................................................................287
3.10 Valve Control Function Block (VALVE) ........................................................................288
3.10.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................289
3.10.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................293
3.10.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................296
3.10.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................297
3.10.5 Example Application ..........................................................................................298

4
 Table of Contents

3.11 Two Outputs Balance Control Function Block (BALANCE)..........................................300

3.11.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................300
3.11.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................304
3.11.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................305
3.12 Single DI/DO Start/Stop Control Function Block (DIO-11M) ........................................305
3.12.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................305
3.12.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................307
3.12.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................309
3.12.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................310
3.12.5 Example Application ..........................................................................................310
3.13 Single DI and Single DO Switch Function Block (DIO-11V).........................................312
3.13.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................312
3.13.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................314
3.13.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................317
3.13.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................317
3.13.5 Application Example ..........................................................................................318
3.14 Dual-DI and Single DO Start & Stop Function Block (DIO-21M)..................................319
3.14.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................320
3.14.2 Logical Control ..................................................................................................321
3.14.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................324
3.14.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................324
3.14.5 Application Example ..........................................................................................325
3.15 Dual-DI and Single DO Switch Function Block (DIO-21V)...........................................327
3.15.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................327
3.15.2 Logical Control ..................................................................................................329
3.15.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................332
3.15.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................332
3.15.5 Application Example ..........................................................................................333
3.16 Dual-DI Start/Stop Valve Observe Function Block (DI-2M) ..........................................335
3.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................335
3.16.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................336
3.16.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................336
3.17 Dual-DI Switch Valve Observe Function Block (DI-2V)................................................337
3.17.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................337
3.17.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................338
3.17.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................338
3.17.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................339

5
 Table of Contents

3.18 Interlock Function Block (INTERLOCK).......................................................................340

3.18.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................340
3.18.2 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................341
3.18.3 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................341
3.18.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................342
3.19 Digital Setting Function Block (DSET_DI_EP).............................................................342
3.19.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................343
3.19.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................343
3.19.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................344
3.19.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................344
3.19.5 Example Application ..........................................................................................344
3.20 Control Function Block for Single Output (DIO-01V) ...................................................346
3.20.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................346
3.20.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................346
3.20.3 Panel Parameter Instruction ..............................................................................348
3.20.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................348
3.20.5 Example Application ..........................................................................................349
3.21 Digital Interlock Function Block (LOCK16) ..................................................................350
3.21.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................351
3.21.2 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................353
3.22 Dual-DI/ Dual-DO Switch Control Function Block (DIO-22V).......................................353
3.22.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................354
3.22.2 Logic Control .....................................................................................................355
3.22.3 Panel Parameter ...............................................................................................358
3.22.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................359

Section 4 Analog Processing Function Block Library ..........................................................361

4.1 Integral Function Block(INTEGRAL)..............................................................................361

4.1.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................361
4.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................364
4.1.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................365
4.2 Differential Function Block (DIFF)..................................................................................366
4.3 Nonlinear Error Calculation Function Block (DEV) ........................................................366
4.4 H Limit Alarm Function Block (HIGHMON) ....................................................................368
4.5 L Limit Alarm Function Block (LOWMON)......................................................................369
4.6 H/L Limit Delay Alarm Function Block (HLMON) ...........................................................369
4.7 Leading and Hysteresis Function Block (LDLAG) .........................................................370

6
 Table of Contents

4.8 Pure Hysteresis Function Block (DED)..........................................................................374

4.9 Deadband Function Block (DB) .....................................................................................375
4.10 Steam Compensation Function Block (STMCOMP) ....................................................376
4.10.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................376
4.10.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................379
4.11 Ideal Gas Compensation Function Block (PTCOMP) ..................................................379
4.12 Limiting Function Block (LIM) ......................................................................................380
4.13 Filter function Block (FILTER)......................................................................................381
4.13.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................381
4.13.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................383
4.14 Statistic Function Block (STAT)....................................................................................384
4.15 Hysteresis Compare Function Block (CMP_LAG) .......................................................385
4.16 Error Alarm Function Block (DVALM) ..........................................................................386
4.17 Signal Generation Function Block (SGNLGEN) ..........................................................387
4.18 Water Enthalpy Compensation Function Block (ENTHALPY) .....................................388
4.19 Natural Gas Compensation Function Block (GASCOMP) ...........................................389
4.20 Air Compensation Function Block (ATMCOMP) ..........................................................397
4.21 Linearization Function Block (FXY) .............................................................................404
4.21.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................404
4.21.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................408
4.21.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................410
4.21.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................410
4.22 Indication Function Block (PVI) ................................................................................... 411
4.22.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................ 411
4.22.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................416
4.22.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................417
4.23 Segment Signal Generate Function Block (CURVE) ...................................................417
4.24 Text Calculation Function Block (CALC) ......................................................................420
4.24.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................421
4.24.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................422
4.25 Text Logic Calculation Function Block(ACTION) .........................................................426
4.26 Extended Indicator Function Block (PVIEX) ................................................................428
4.26.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................429
4.26.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................435
4.26.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................437
4.26.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................438
4.27 Extended Linearization Chart Functional Block (FXYEX) ............................................438

7
 Table of Contents

4.27.1 Parameter instruction ........................................................................................438

4.27.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................445
4.27.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................450
4.28 Alarm Auto Track Function Block (ALMTR) .................................................................450
4.29 Extended Integral Function Block (INTEGRALX) ........................................................451
4.29.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................452
4.29.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................456
4.29.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................458
4.29.4 Application Example ..........................................................................................458
4.30 Extended Ideal Gas Compensation Function Block (PTCOMPX) ...............................459
4.30.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................460
4.30.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................461
4.31 Setting Function Block (DSET)....................................................................................463
4.31.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................464
4.31.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................467
4.31.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................468
4.32 Setting Function Block (DSET_EP) .............................................................................468
4.32.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................469
4.32.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................470
4.32.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................470
4.33 Ramp Function Block (RAMP).....................................................................................471
4.34 Date Timer Function Block (DATETIMER)...................................................................472
4.35 Moving-average Block (AVE_M)..................................................................................473
4.36 Sampling Function Block (SAMPLE) ...........................................................................475

Section 5 Selection Function Block Library User Manual.....................................................478

5.1 Two to One Selector Function Block (TWOSEL) ...........................................................478

5.1.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................478
5.1.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................481
5.1.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................482
5.2 Select One of Three Options Function Block (THRSEL) ...............................................482
5.2.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................482
5.2.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................485
5.2.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................486
5.3 Eight Input Signal Select Function Block (ISEL8)..........................................................486
5.3.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................487
5.3.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................489

8
 Table of Contents

5.3.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................490

5.3.4 Application Example ............................................................................................491
5.4 Digital Switch Function Block (DS) ................................................................................492
5.5 Analog Switch Function Block (ASW) ............................................................................492
5.6 Multi-choice of Eight Digital Signal Select Function Block (SS8) ...................................493
5.6.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................493
5.6.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................495
5.6.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................496
5.7 USINT Select Function Block (USINTSW) ....................................................................496
5.8 UINT Select Function Block (UNITSW) .........................................................................497
5.9 UDINT Select Function Block (UDINTSW) ....................................................................497
5.10 SINT Select Function Block (SINTSW)........................................................................498
5.11 INT Select Function Block (INTSW).............................................................................498
5.12 DINT Select Function Block (DINTSW) .......................................................................499
5.13 16-channel Digital Selection Function Block (BSEL16) ...............................................499
5.14 Extended Two Input Signal Selector Function Block (TWOSELX) ..............................501
5.14.1 Prameter Instruction ..........................................................................................501
5.14.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ...................................................................504
5.14.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................505
5.14.4 Application Example..........................................................................................505
5.15 Extended Three Input Signal Selector Function Block (THRSELX).............................507
5.15.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................507
5.15.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ................................................................... 511
5.15.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................512
5.15.4 Application Example..........................................................................................512
5.16 Maximum Selection Function Block (THRSELH).........................................................514
5.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................514
5.16.2 Flag ...................................................................................................................517
5.17 Median Selection Function Block (THRSELM) ............................................................517
5.17.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................518
5.17.2 Flag ...................................................................................................................520
5.18 Minimum Selection Function Block (THRSELL) ..........................................................521
5.18.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................521
5.18.2 Flag ...................................................................................................................524

Section 6 Arithmetic Function Block Library .........................................................................525

6.1 ADD Function Block (ADD)............................................................................................525

9
 Table of Contents

6.2 Eight-Channel ADD Function Block (ADD8) ..................................................................525

6.3 Subtraction Function Block (SUB) .................................................................................526
6.3.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................526
6.3.2 Application Example ............................................................................................527
6.4 (Multiplication) Function Block (MUL) ............................................................................528
6.5 Division Function Block (DIV) ........................................................................................529
6.6 Square Root Function Block (SQRT).............................................................................530
6.7 Absolute Value Function Block (ABS)............................................................................530
6.8 EXP Function Block (EXP) ............................................................................................531
6.9 POW Function Block (POW) .........................................................................................531
6.10 Natural Logarithm Function Block (LN)........................................................................532
6.11 Logarithm Function Block (LOG) .................................................................................532
6.12 Module Function Block (MOD) ....................................................................................533
6.13 Polynomial Function Block (POLY)..............................................................................534
6.14 DINT to REAL Function Block (DINT2REAL) ..............................................................534
6.15 REAL to DINT Function Block (REAL2DINT) ..............................................................535
6.16 DOUBLE to REAL Function Block (DOUBLE2REAL)..................................................535
6.17 INT to REAL Function Block (INT2REAL)....................................................................536
6.18 REAL to INT Function Block (REAL2INT)....................................................................536
6.19 REAL to LREAL Function Block (REAL2LREAL).........................................................537
6.20 LREAL to REAL Function Block (LREAL2REAL).........................................................537
6.21 SINT to INT Function Block (SINT2INT) ......................................................................538
6.22 INT to SINT Function Block (INT2SINT) ......................................................................538
6.23 UDINT to DINT Function Block (UDINT2DINT) ...........................................................538
6.24 DINT to UDINT Function Block (DINT2UDINT) ...........................................................539
6.25 UNIT to INT Function Block (UNIT2INT)......................................................................539
6.26 INT to UNIT Function Block (INT2UNIT)......................................................................540
6.27 USINT to SINT Function Block (USINT2SINT) ............................................................540
6.28 SINT to USINT Function Block (SINT2USINT) ............................................................540
6.29 INT to DINT Function Block (INT2DINT)......................................................................541
6.30 DINT to INT Function Block (DINT2INT)......................................................................541
6.31 BOOL Assignment Sentence Function Block (MOV_BOOL) .......................................542
6.32 SINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_SINT)...........................................................542
6.33 INT Assignment Function Block (MOV_INT) ...............................................................543
6.34 DINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_DINT) ..........................................................543
6.35 REAL Assignment Function Block (MOV_REAL) ........................................................544
6.36 LREAL Assignment Function Block (MOV_LREAL) ....................................................544

10
 Table of Contents

6.37 UNIT Assignment Function Block (MOV_UNIT) ..........................................................545

6.38 UDINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_UDINT) .....................................................545
6.39 USINT Assignment Function Block (MOV_USINT)......................................................546
6.40 Matrix Add Function Block (MADD) .............................................................................546
6.41 Matrix Multiply Function Block (MMUL) .......................................................................549
6.42 UNIT Add Function Block (ADD_UNIT) .......................................................................551
6.43 INT Add Function Block (ADD_INT) ............................................................................552
6.44 UNIT Subtraction Function Block (SUB_UNIT) ...........................................................552
6.45 INT Subtraction Function Block (SUB_INT).................................................................553

Section 7 Logical Operation Function Block Library ............................................................554

7.1 AND Function Block.......................................................................................................554

7.1.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................554
7.1.2 Example ..............................................................................................................554
7.2 OR Function Block.........................................................................................................554
7.2.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................555
7.2.2 Application Example ............................................................................................555
7.3 NOT Function Block ......................................................................................................555
7.3.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................555
7.3.2 Application Example ............................................................................................556
7.4 XOR Function Block ......................................................................................................556
7.5 AND8 Function Block.....................................................................................................556
7.6 OR8 Function Block.......................................................................................................557
7.7 WIPEOUT Function Block .............................................................................................558
7.8 PVDI Function Block......................................................................................................559
7.8.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................559
7.8.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................560
7.8.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................561
7.9 RS Function Block .........................................................................................................561
7.10 SR Function Block .......................................................................................................562
7.11 DFF Function Block .....................................................................................................563
7.12 COUNTER Function Block ..........................................................................................565
7.13 TRIG Function Block ...................................................................................................566
7.14 TON Function Block ....................................................................................................567
7.14.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................567
7.14.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................568
7.15 TOFF Function Block...................................................................................................569

11
 Table of Contents

7.16 TP Function Block .......................................................................................................570

7.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................570
7.16.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................570
7.17 TIMER Function Block.................................................................................................570
7.18 TON_HOLD Function Block.........................................................................................571
7.19 TP_TR Function Block.................................................................................................572
7.20 TIMEREX Function Block ............................................................................................573
7.20.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................573
7.21 Bypass Monitoring Function Block (MOS_SOR_WD) .................................................574
7.21.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................574
7.21.2 Usage................................................................................................................575
7.21.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................577
7.21.4 Examples...........................................................................................................578

Section 8 Comparison Function Block Library ......................................................................579

8.1 NE Function Block .........................................................................................................579

8.2 EQ Function Block.........................................................................................................579
8.3 GT Function Block .........................................................................................................580
8.4 GE Function Block.........................................................................................................580
8.5 LT Function Block ..........................................................................................................581
8.6 LE Function Block..........................................................................................................581
8.7 NE_INT Function Block .................................................................................................582
8.8 EQ_INT Function Block .................................................................................................582
8.9 GT_INT Function Block .................................................................................................583
8.10 GE_INT Function Block ...............................................................................................583
8.11 LT_INT Function Block.................................................................................................584
8.12 LE_INT Function Block................................................................................................584
8.13 NE_UNIT Function Block.............................................................................................584
8.14 EQ_UNIT Function Block ............................................................................................585
8.15 GT_UNIT Function Block.............................................................................................585
8.16 GE_UNIT Function Block ............................................................................................586
8.17 LT_UNIT Function Block..............................................................................................586
8.18 LE_UNIT Function Block .............................................................................................587

Section 9 I/O Special Process Function Block Library..........................................................588

9.1 PATCON Function Block................................................................................................588

9.1.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................588

12
 Table of Contents

9.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .........................................................................595

9.1.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................596
9.2 TC_CJC Function Block ................................................................................................597
9.3 CABALM Function Block ...............................................................................................598
9.4 PIACCUM Function Block .............................................................................................599
9.4.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................600
9.4.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................601
9.4.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................602
9.4.4 Application Example ............................................................................................602
9.5 SOEACCUM Function Block .........................................................................................603
9.5.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................603
9.5.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel .....................................................................605
9.5.3 Flag .....................................................................................................................606
9.5.4 Application Example ............................................................................................606
9.6 IO_FLAG Function Block...............................................................................................606
9.6.1 Parameter Instruction ..........................................................................................607
9.6.2 Application Example............................................................................................608
9.7 TC_CJCX Function Block..............................................................................................610
9.8 PTM Function block....................................................................................................... 611
9.9 HCM Function Block......................................................................................................617
9.10 SSIM Function Block ...................................................................................................621
9.11 PI_MIG Function Block (Calculation PI Signal Process)..............................................624
9.11.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................625
9.11.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ...................................................................627
9.11.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................628
9.12 PAT_MIG Function Block (PAT Position Adjust Function Block) ..................................628
9.12.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................628
9.12.2 Function Block Panel Parameter .......................................................................634
9.12.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................635
9.13 SERVO_MIG Function Block (Valve Servo Control Module) .......................................635
9.14 SERVOCON Function Block (Valve Servo Control Module) ........................................639
9.14.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................639
9.14.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ...................................................................644
9.14.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................645
9.15 SPEED_MIG Function Block (Speed Detection and Overspeed Protect Module) .......646
9.16 SPEEDTST Function Block (Speed Detection and Overspeed Protect Module) .........647
9.16.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................648

13
 Table of Contents

9.16.2 Flag ...................................................................................................................651

9.17 MODULECOMM Function Block .................................................................................651
9.17.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................651
9.18 CANCOMM Function Block .........................................................................................653
9.19 Cold Startup Function Block (COLD_START)..............................................................654

Section 10 Sequence Control Function Block .......................................................................656

10.1 SQC Function Block ....................................................................................................656

10.2 STP Function Block .....................................................................................................658
10.2.1 Flag ...................................................................................................................666
10.2.2 Parameter of Function Block Panel ...................................................................666
10.2.3 Program Example..............................................................................................667

Section 11 Communication Auxiliary Function Block Library ..............................................668

11.1 BCD2DEC Function Block ...........................................................................................668

11.2 DEC2BCD Function Block ...........................................................................................669
11.3 HEX2DEC Function Block ...........................................................................................670
11.4 DEC2HEX Function Block ...........................................................................................670
11.5 BIN2BCD Function Block.............................................................................................671
11.6 BCD2BIN Function Block.............................................................................................672
11.7 BLOGIC_16 Function Block.........................................................................................672
11.8 BLOGIC_32 Function Block.........................................................................................674
11.9 LSH_16 Function Block ...............................................................................................675
11.10 LSH_32 Function Block .............................................................................................676
11.11 RSH_16 Function Block .............................................................................................677
11.12 RSH_32 Function Block.............................................................................................678
11.13 ASCTRAN Function Block .........................................................................................678
11.14 ASCPARSE Function Block .......................................................................................679
11.15 USIPARSE Function Block ........................................................................................680
11.16 GETUDI Function Block.............................................................................................680
11.17 REALTRAN Function Block .......................................................................................681
11.18 UNITPARSE Function Block ......................................................................................681
11.18.1 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................682
11.18.2 Application Example ........................................................................................682
11.19 UDINTPARSE Function Block ...................................................................................686
11.20 BOOL2UDINT Function Block ...................................................................................687
11.21 Parse REAL to UDINT Function Block (SREAL_UDINT) ...........................................689

14
 Table of Contents

11.22 Parse UDINT to REAL Function Block (GREAL_UDINT) ..........................................690

Section 12 Inter-station Communication Function Block Library ........................................691

12.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................691
12.2 SEND_MIX Function Block..........................................................................................692
12.2.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................692
12.2.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................693
12.3 GET_MIX Function Block ............................................................................................696
12.3.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................696
12.3.2 Application Example ..........................................................................................698
12.4 SEND_REAL Function Block.......................................................................................698
12.5 GET_REAL Function Block .........................................................................................699
12.6 SENDSPEC Function Block ........................................................................................700
12.7 GETSPEC Function Block...........................................................................................702
12.8 UDINT Data Inter-station Send Function Block (SEND_UDINT) .................................703
12.9 UDINT Data Inter-station Get Function Block (GET_UDINT) ......................................705
12.10 Inter-station Communication Programming Example ................................................706

Section 13 Industrial Function Block Library.........................................................................708

13.1 Fuzzy Control Function Block(FLC).............................................................................708

13.1.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................708
13.1.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................717
13.1.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................721
13.1.4 Programming Example for Application ..............................................................722
13.2 Predictive Function Control Function Block For Single Variable(PFC) ........................722
13.2.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................723
13.2.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................730
13.2.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................734
13.2.4 Prediction Control Algorithm ..............................................................................735
13.2.5 Method of Place in Service................................................................................736
13.3 PID Self-tune Function Block (PID_TUN) ....................................................................736
13.3.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................737
13.3.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................748
13.3.3 PID Parameters Self-Tuning..............................................................................753
13.3.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................754
13.3.5 Programming Example For Apply......................................................................754
13.4 SMITH Predictor Function Block (SMITH) ...................................................................755

15
 Table of Contents

13.4.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................755

13.4.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................764
13.4.3 Flag ...................................................................................................................768
13.4.4 Programming Example For Apply......................................................................769
13.4.5 Matters Need Attention......................................................................................769
13.5 Branches Balance Control of Oil Furnace Function Block (BALANCE8) .....................769
13.5.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................771
13.5.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................790
13.5.3 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................800
13.5.4 HMI Parameters ................................................................................................801
13.5.5 Define branch running status (RUN_STAT) .......................................................801
13.5.6 Define Branch Mode (RUN_MODE)..................................................................802
13.5.7 Switch Mode......................................................................................................802
13.5.8 Programming Instruction For Apply ...................................................................806
13.5.9 Algorithm ...........................................................................................................807
13.5.10 Keep Difference (Only Valid for Differential Method) .......................................814
13.5.11 Dead Zone.......................................................................................................814
13.6 One Driver Common Motor Control Function Block(MOTOR_PT) ..............................814
13.6.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................815
13.6.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................817
13.6.3 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................818
13.6.4 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................818
13.7 Positive/Negative Rotating Motor Control with Position Limit Function Block
(MOTOR_FM) .....................................................................................................................819
13.7.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................819
13.7.2 Function Block Panel Parameters .....................................................................822
13.7.3 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................823
13.7.4 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................823
13.7.5 Application Example ..........................................................................................824
13.8 One Driver Common Motor Control Function Block With Simulation Function
(MOTOR_SIM) ....................................................................................................................827
13.8.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................828
13.8.2 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................832
13.8.3 Logic Time Sequencing .....................................................................................833
13.9 Valve Control Function Block With Simulation Function (DIO21V_SIM)......................833
13.9.1 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................834
13.9.2 Function Block Flag Code .................................................................................837

16
 Table of Contents

Section 14 FF Standard Function Block Library ....................................................................839

14.1 FOUNDATION Overview .................................................................................................839

14.1.1 Modes ...............................................................................................................839
14.1.2 I/O Block Channel Setting .................................................................................841
14.1.3 Failsafe Function ...............................................................................................841
14.1.4 Process Alarm ...................................................................................................841
14.1.5 Extend Pin .........................................................................................................842
14.1.6 Function Block Options .....................................................................................843
14.2 Status Process.............................................................................................................844
14.2.1 Pin Status Instruction ........................................................................................845
14.2.2 Notice of FF and DCS Blocks............................................................................848
14.3 FFAI.............................................................................................................................849
14.3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................849
14.3.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................849
14.3.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................854
14.3.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................857
14.4 FFPID ..........................................................................................................................858
14.4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................858
14.4.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................858
14.4.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................869
14.4.4 Algorithm ...........................................................................................................869
14.4.5 Flag ...................................................................................................................871
14.5 FFAO ...........................................................................................................................873
14.5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................873
14.5.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................873
14.5.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................879
14.5.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................881
14.6 FFDI ............................................................................................................................882
14.6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................882
14.6.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................882
14.6.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................885
14.6.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................886
14.7 FFDO...........................................................................................................................888
14.7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................888
14.7.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................888
14.7.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................892

17
 Table of Contents

14.7.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................893

14.8 FFARTHM....................................................................................................................894
14.8.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................894
14.8.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................894
14.8.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................899
14.8.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................902
14.9 FFCTLSL.....................................................................................................................904
14.9.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................904
14.9.2 Parameter Instruction ........................................................................................904
14.9.3 Instruction Details..............................................................................................909
14.9.4 Flag ...................................................................................................................910
14.10 FFCUSTOM...............................................................................................................912
14.10.1 Overview .........................................................................................................912
14.10.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................912
14.10.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................917
14.10.4 Flag .................................................................................................................917
14.11 FFINT ........................................................................................................................918
14.11.1 Overview..........................................................................................................918
14.11.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................918
14.11.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................925
14.11.4 Flag..................................................................................................................929
14.12 FFISEL ......................................................................................................................930
14.12.1 Overview .........................................................................................................930
14.12.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................930
14.12.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................936
14.12.4 Flag .................................................................................................................937
14.13 FFISEL_EX ...............................................................................................................938
14.13.1 Overview .........................................................................................................938
14.13.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................938
14.13.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................944
14.13.4 Flag .................................................................................................................945
14.14 FFMAI........................................................................................................................946
14.14.1 Overview .........................................................................................................946
14.14.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................946
14.14.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................951
14.14.4 Flag .................................................................................................................952
14.15 FFMAO......................................................................................................................953

18
 Table of Contents

14.15.1 Overview .........................................................................................................953

14.15.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................953
14.15.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................958
14.15.4 Flag .................................................................................................................958
14.16 FFMDI .......................................................................................................................960
14.16.1 Overview .........................................................................................................960
14.16.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................960
14.16.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................964
14.16.4 Flag .................................................................................................................965
14.17 FFMDO......................................................................................................................966
14.17.1 Overview .........................................................................................................966
14.17.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................966
14.17.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................970
14.17.4 Flag .................................................................................................................971
14.18 FFSGCR....................................................................................................................972
14.18.1 Overview .........................................................................................................972
14.18.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................972
14.18.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................979
14.18.4 Flag .................................................................................................................981
14.19 FFSPLIT ....................................................................................................................981
14.19.1 Overview .........................................................................................................981
14.19.2 Parameter Instruction ......................................................................................982
14.19.3 Instruction Details ............................................................................................988
14.19.4 Flag .................................................................................................................990

Section 15 Revision..................................................................................................................992

19
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Reference

Section 1 Overview
The function block library includes 4 categories: system function block library, industry function
block library, user function block library and FF standard function block library. System function
block library contains control function block library, logical control function block library, analog
process function block library, select calculation function block library, arithmetic calculation
function block library, logical operation function block library, communication auxiliary function
block library, inter-station communication function block library, sequence control function block
library, IO special processing function block library and comparison function block library.

Industry function block library contains 9 industry function blocks which are aimed at industry
character design. It can effectively improve the effect of the control over specific character.

User function block library contains the application-special blocks which are designed by the users
themselves.

FF (Foundation Fieldbus) function block is basic unit for control project building control application
in FF fieldbus.

1.1 Work Mode of Function Block

There are six work modes for function block, from high priority to low priority: OOS (out of service),
IMAN (initial value), TR (Track), MAN (manual), AUTO (automatic), CAS (cascade).

Six running statuses are mutual exclusive and a function block is only in one status.

Function blocks can be set five work modes: OOS (out of service), TR (track), MAN (manual),
AUTO (automatic), CAS (cascade). Work mode cannot be set IMAN status.

1.1.1 OOS (Out of Service)

When the function block is in OOS status, calculation is stopped and output is kept the set value
(previous period or security value). However, data multicast, parameter validity check and
redundancy process proceed forward. When the function block is downloaded first time, OOS
status is suggested.

1.1.2 Initial Status (IMAN)

The function block is in initial status when conditions below are reached:

1
 Function Block Reference

1. When AO function block connected with pre-positive control function block is in manual,
track or AO tag fault status, pre-positive control function block is in initial status.

2. When two control function blocks are constructed cascaded loop, if postposition is in
non-cascade status, pre-positive control function block is in initial status.

When a function block is in initial status, its output tracks inversion calculating input value (BKIN)
of the function block. BKIN should be connected with inversion calculating output value (BKOUT)
of postposition. In this case, the function block only can be transferred to OOS mode.

1.1.3 Track (TR)

If high priority mode is not achieved, when the track switch SWTR is ON, it is in track mode and
output tracks input track value.

SWTR is set by input or output of other function blocks.

1.1.4 Manual (MAN)

If higher priority mode is not achieved, when manual switch of the function block SWAM is OFF,
the function block is in manual mode and the output value can be set manually.

1.1.5 Auto (AUTO)

If higher priority mode is not achieved, when manual switch of the function block SWAM is ON and
SWSV is OFF, the function block is in auto mode and the control arithmetic can be operated and
output.

1.1.6 Cascade (CAS)

If higher priority mode is not achieved, when manual switch of the function block SWAM is ON and
SWSV is ON, the function block is in sequence mode. Meanwhile, the set value of the function
block is equal to setting value of cascade and the control arithmetic can be operated.

1.2 Active/Inactive

There are two flags for each function block: Input active/Close flag and output active/Close flag.

The function block cannot deal with the Active/InActive flag and the two flags are responded by
FBD program. When a function block is in status of input close, all inputs are not updated by
program; When a function block is in status of output close, the function block is implemented and
output normally. However, its output is not updated to input of postposition function block (output
value of postposition function block is not updated by program).

After the function block is downloaded to the main controller, its input and output can be set close
in FBD software. In status of input close, input of the function block can be set forced and the

2
 Function Block Reference

function block logic can be debugged, in which way to find out if it is right. In status of output close,
the debug does not bump the field.

Note: It may destroy the running process status and the output may be bumped when it is
transferred from the close status to the active status. The engineer should select an appropriate
time to transfer.

1.3 Data Type

Table 1-1 Data Type Parameter List

Type Byte Range of Data Explain

BOOL 1 ON/OFF 0=OFF, Not 0=ON
USINT 1 0~255 -
SINT 1 -128~127 -
UNIT 2 0~65535 -
INT 2 -32768~32767 -
UDINT 4 0~4294967295 -
-2147483648~214748364
DINT 4 -
7
Exponential term is 8 digit, and
REAL 4  (~ 10 44.85 ~ 10 38.53 )
fraction term is 23 digit
Exponential term is 11digit, and
LREAL 8  (~ 10 323.3 ~ 10 308.3 )
fraction term is 52 digit

1.4 Parameter Sort of Function Block

Function block parameter includes operation parameter, config parameter, supervising parameter,
alarm parameter, input pin and output parameter.

 Operation parameter

 Normally, the function block panels can be used to set parameter while the system
is running. Specific to every block, it depends on the working mode of the function
block.

 Config parameter

 Config parameter can be set while FBD programming. While programming, the
parameter can be set in the Properties window of the function block.

 Supervising parameter

 Supervising parameter can be showed by supervising image or panel. Whether to

show it or not can be set in the Properties window of the function block.

 Alarm parameter

3
 Function Block Reference

 Enable/disable the alarm of all kinds of parameters. It can be selected in the

Properties window of the function block.

 Input/ output parameter

 To find out the characters which are connected to input/ output pins, refer to line
“Link Reference” in Table 2-3 Experience data for controller parameter.

Attention:

Except for config parameter, parameters can be set during debug.

Function block Properties setting interface is divided into Basic Parameters and expansion
parameter, for normal PID control there is only need for Basic Parameters setting.

1.5 Function Block Panel

Function block evolves from instrument panel, which includes information list of function block and
operation commands of operators. It has three functions: monitor and modify status and
parameters of function block, set parameters and operation and switch to different supervision
panels.

Only complicated function block (the function block which can be named when configuration)
possesses function block panel, does not simple function block.

4
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-1 Window of panel layout of function block and function block pane

1.5.1 Fixed Button

The button is on the top right of the pop-up panel. When click the button , it will become and
the panel will always be on top.

1.5.2 Close Button

The button is on the top right of the panel and there is no close button on the panel of control
group display.

1.5.3 FB Tag Name

Tag name or instance name of function block will be displayed in the part of tag instance name,
which is used to distinguish function blocks.

5
 Function Block Reference

1.5.4 Selected, Alarm, ACK

Select: Select the panel to be operated currently.

Alarm: Indicate alarm status of the tag which the panel corresponds to.

ACK: Alarm acknowledgement of corresponding tags is implemented.

1.5.5 Detailed Information of Alarm

Display the current alarm information (such as HH, LL and so on) and status (such as manual,
auto, cascade and OOS, etc.) of tags or function blocks.

1.5.6 Analog Data Area

Display value and unit of analogy in tag or function block, for example, PV, MV, SV in PID function
block.

1.5.7 Basic Operation Area

Basic operation of operators area in tag or function block, which includes manual , auto ,

cascade , is used to set work status of function block.

1.5.8 Digital Button or Analog Bar Diagram Display Area

 Digital data: display digital value by bottom. Text likes “ON” or “OFF” will be shown on the
button. DI and DO button color can be set when configuring tag.

 Analog data: Real-time values of import parameters are dynamically displayed in form of
histogram. High and low span values are displayed on two sides of scale. There are also
marks of HH Limit, high Limit, low Limit and LL Limit.

Color of bar diagram is same with alarm status of function block or tag. As shown below,
the bar diagram is green because there parameter has no alarm.

6
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-2 Trend display

Color of bar diagram is shown by following rules:

 If tag only has H limit alarm, color of bar diagram is shown as configured in monitoring
configuration for H limit alarm.

 If tag has H/ HH limit alarms together, color of bar diagram is shown as configured in
monitoring configuration for HH limit alarm.

 Other alarms are also shown in the same manner.

1.5.9 Auxiliary Operation Area

Data can be operated by keyboard besides by basic operation buttons.

1. Fast-increased button: set the percentage when configuring function block properties.
The default value is 2.5%.

2. Slowly-increased button: set the percentage when configuring function block

properties. The default value is 0.25%.

3. Slowly-decreased button: its value is the same as the slowly-increased value.

4. Fast-decreased button: its value is the same as the fast-increased value.

1.5.10 Switchover Button Area

There are 5 switchover buttons at the bottom of the panel, from left to right, logic diagram, graphics
button, trend display button, Alarm view button and tuning panel:

Figure 1-3 Switchover buttons

1. Logic diagram button: Pop up the logic diagram associated with tag (set in
VFFBDBuilder). The button will be grey and cannot be clicked if the function block isn’t
configured in logic diagram.

2. Graphics button: Pop up graphics associated with the tag (set in supervision
configuration). The button will be grey and cannot be clicked if the function block isn’t
configured in graphics.

3. Trend display button: Pop up trend display associated with the tag (set in supervision
configuration). The button will be grey and cannot be clicked if the function block isn’t
configured in trend.

4. Alarm view button: Pop up history alarm table.

5. Tuning window button: Pop up tuning panel of the tag.

7
 Function Block Reference

1.5.11 Tag Description

Display description information of the tag or function block. It includes 64 English characters or 32
Chinese characters.

1.5.12 Operation Authority of Panel

There are operation authorities for each parameter in panel or tuning panel, which can be set in
panel authority setting of supervision configuration software.

There are ten Authorities, including: unavailable, operator-, operator, operator+, engineer-,
engineer, engineer+, privilege-, privilege, privilege+.

1.5.13 Operator Keyboard Operation

Some parameters can be operated by operator keyboard:

DO digital operation, fast-increased and fast-decreased of function block operation

and tuning panel switch.

1.5.14 Function Block Panel Example

PID Tuning Panel is shown as follow.

8
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-4 PID tuning panel

Main operations can be implemented on function block panel is shown as follows:

1. Status Switch

Click , , , to switch work status. As shown in Figure 1-3 the function

block is in the status of auto, and the status area displays “AUTO”.

2. Set Value for SV&MV

The value of SV can be set in the status of auto while the value of MV can be set in the status of
manual. Two modes of setting value are shown as follows:

9
 Function Block Reference

 Input the value via keyboard and then press “Enter”.

 Click to set value. , are fast increase buttons, , are fast

decrease buttons. The fast increase/decrease values are set in the function block
properties interface. As default, click once to increase by 2.5% of range, click
once to increase by 0.25% of range, click once to decrease by 0.25% of range, click

once to decrease by 2.5% of range.

3. Parameter Setting

 Set parameter via select the “select box “or not.

 Modify parameter value via Input the value and press “Enter”.

 Some parameters such as HH Limit, high Limit, etc, should be selected the “select box”
first, and then the corresponding parameter will be modified, as shown in Figure 1-4.

10
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-5 Set the HH limit

4. Switchover Window

Click to switch to corresponding window. Logic diagram should be

configured in VFFBDBuilder, and graphics and trend should be configured in VFHMICfg first.

5. Alarm Acknowledgement and Alarm Shield

 Click to acknowledge alarm.

 Click to implement alarm shield or cancel alarm shield.

11
 Function Block Reference

6. Parameter Page Switch

Click to switch to each parameter page.

7. Trend View

Right-click on the trend display area of function block tuning panel, then implement trend setting in
the pop-up right-click menu, as shown in Figure 1-5. The function of commands in right-click menu
is the same as the right-click menu in trend display, please refer to Real-time Supervision Software
User Manual for the corresponding instruction.

Select “Save Custom Page” after setting, then a file (.TCP) named after a tag will be saved. In
custom page of trend, click “Read Page”, users can select this file in the pop-up dialog box of “File
Selection”, and then the trend diagram of this tag can be viewed in custom page.

12
 Function Block Reference

Figure 1-6 Trend view

13
 Function Block Reference

Section 2 Control Function Block Library

The control function block library contains 16 control function blocks. They are complex function
blocks and each has corresponding function block panel, and can invoke the function block panel
in the monitoring software.

2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block

Basic work flow of control function block: is shown below.

Figure 2-1 Basic work flow of control function block

2.1.1 Mode And Parameter Status (MODE)

Corresponding parameter status in different operation modes is shown below. * can refer to any
status.

Table 2-1 Operation mode list

SWOOS BKINERR SWTR SWAM SWSV Mode MODE Value

ON * * * * OOS 1
OFF ON * * * IMAN 2

14
 Function Block Reference

SWOOS BKINERR SWTR SWAM SWSV Mode MODE Value

OFF OFF ON * * TR 3
OFF OFF OFF OFF * MAN 4
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF AUTO 5
OFF OFF OFF ON ON CAS 6

1. Operation Mode

 OOS

The output value MV is configured according to OOS_OPT in this mode. Choose to hold output or
output OOSVAL safe value.

 Initial mode (IMAN)

When feedback value and feedback status of downstream function block are connected to BKIN
and BKINERR, output will be updated according to BKOUT value of downstream function block.

Only when BKINERR1= ON and BKINERR2= ON for split control (SPLIT), function block is in
IMAN mode.

 Track (TR)

When the function block is in track mode, output is equal to the track input value TV. Output MV is
still limited. If TV value is over limit, it will be in the limit range. If TV is less than MVL, MV is equal
to MVL. If TV is greater than MVH, MV is equal to MVH.

 Manual (MAN)

Set values manually, when MV=MANMV, while the output MV is limited.

 Auto (AUTO)

Output is controlled automatically. In the AUTO mode, BKOUTERR=OFF. In other modes,

BKOUTERR=ON.

 Cascade (CAS)

The setting value CSV is from output of upstream block.

Tip: details of operation mode refer to 1.1.

2. Function Block Mode Fallback

Function block fallback can be divided to manual fallback and automatic fallback, manual fall back
can be set as default. The backup operation mode (IMODE) corresponding to each operation
mode (MODE) is only a reference for field operator.

15
 Function Block Reference

When MODE_OPT=OFF, the function block mode applies manual fallback, as shown below. The
mode in the brackets is IMODE.

Figure 2-2 Manual fallback mode of control function block

When MODE_OPT is ON, function block mode is auto fallback, shown as follows.

Figure 2-3 Automatic fallback mode of control function block

There is IMODE mode in the bracket. TR and IMAN cannot be sub-mode of OOS.

When MODE is CAS, BKOUTERR is OFF. Otherwise, BKOUTERR is ON.

No matter auto or manual back, when back occurs after cold starting the system, user must return
to manual mode.

16
 Function Block Reference

2.1.2 Input Process

Figure 2-4 Input process of control function block

Process variable alarm

There are four limit alarm for process input variables: HH limit alarm (PVHH), high limit alarm
(PVH), low limit alarm (PVL) and LL limit alarm (PVLL), which are hysteresis. When PV is greater
than or equal to PVHH, HH limit alarm and high limit alarm are generated; When PV is greater
than or equal to PVH, high limit alarm is generated; When PV is less than PVL, low limit alarm is
generated; When PV is less than or equal to PVLL, LL limit alarm and low limit alarm are
generated.

Following conditions should be reached for these four values: PVHH-PVHYS>PVH,

PVH-PVHYS>PVL+PVHYS, PVL>PVLL+PVHYS.

17
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-5 Alarm process of control function block

Input compensation

Input compensation is used to add compensation value derived outside to input signal PV
operated by control function block. The expression is:

PVR  PV  IK ( IA  IB)

Input compensation is used to improve controllability of process with long deadband.

Check Validity

Note: Only function blocks PID, PIDEX and PIDEP have the function.

Check the validity of PV after input compensation, which can exclude the PV noise signal caused
by transducer disturbance and signal transmission interference.

Enable the function via SWPV. If PV exceeds the check limit PVLMT after compensation of this
and last periods, and it happens for the first time continuously, this period is applied for holding PV
in PID calculation. There will be no filter after exceeding once continuously because the signal
may change quickly.

18
 Function Block Reference

2.1.3 Set Variable Process

Figure 2-6 Set variable process of control function block

3. Set variable track

When the control mode is transferred from manual mode to auto mode or from track mode to auto
mode, there may be huge error, which cause MV fluctuate to bump. Therefore, in manual or track
mode, forced SV tracks change of PV after output compensation (PVR), which can avoid bumping
when the control mode is transferred from manual mode to auto mode and from track mode to
auto mode.

In the cascade control loop, the master loop can run in auto or cascade mode. If the salve loop is
transferred from cascade mode to auto mode, the cascaded loop is open, the master loop is in
IMAN mode and the salve loop can be controlled separately. In this case, SV of the master loop
can be consistent with PV by tracking PV.

Whether process value is tracked by set value can be selected by SVTR_OPT: When SVTR_OPT
is ON, track; When SVTR_OPT is OFF, not track. When it is in not track mode, there is slight bump,
transferring from manual to auto.

If PVR is over SVH and SVL, SV is equal to range limit and not equal to PVR.

1) Set value limit and alarm

High limit of set value (SVH) must be greater than or equal to low limit of set value (SVL).
Otherwise, limit will not be processed and configuration error alarm (CFGERR) will be generated.

The set value SV is limit between high limit of set value SVH and low limit of set value SVL. When
the set value is out range of SVH and SVL, it is set as high limit or low limit and an alarm is
generated. If SVH is less than SVL, SV maintains the value of last period. Similarly, in mode of
cascade, if CSV is between SVH and SVL, SV is equal to CSV. If CSV is greater than SVH, SV is
equal to SVH. If CSV is less than SVL, SV is equal to SVL; If SVH is less than SVL, SV maintains
the value of last period.

19
 Function Block Reference

2) SV and CSV

There are two set values in the control function block, SV and CSV. When one is used, the other
will be consistent with this.

3) Ramp action of set value

Ramp action of set value indicates that in auto or cascade mode, when the set value is changed,
the set value inclines to SV according to the set ramp RAMP and RAMP is in unit of second. Ramp
action of set value is enabled or disabled by switch SWRAMP. When SWRAMP is ON, ramp action
of set value is enabled; When SWRAMP is OFF, ramp action of set value is disabled.

2.1.4 Operation Process

Figure 2-7 Operation process of control function block

1. Nonlinear gain

The function of nonlinear gain can process processes with nonlinear gain by providing a gain
contrary to the process, for example, PH control, its process gain will become very big near the
target value.

The actual proportion gain KP can be gained by revising proportion gain 100/PB nonlinearly (PB
cannot be less than 0.1).

The function block provides two kinds of nonlinear gain, including gap action and EI square action.

 Gap action

When deviation EI is in the set nonlinear gain range GW, whose range is ［SCSCL-SVSCH］, the
actual proportion gain KP is 100.0/PB*KN, KN is gain factor whose valid range is [0.0, 1.0].

20
 Function Block Reference

When deviation EI is out of the nonlinear gain range GW, the actual proportion gain is

 EI square action

When deviation EI is in the set nonlinear gain range GW, the actual proportion gain is

When deviation EI is out nonlinear gain range GW, the actual proportion gain KP is 100.0/PB.

Gap action (NGN_OPT=ON) and EI square action (NGN_OPT=OFF) can be selected by the
nonlinear gain option parameter NGN_OPT.

1) Deviation deadband action

Some process control system, such as tank level control system, is not required to control the tank
level at the set value accurately and the tank level can change in the set range. In this case,
deviation deadband action is introduced to avoid adjustment valve acting frequently and system
oscillation.

When absolute value of deviation EI between SV and PV is less than deviation deadband DB
minus lag value DBHYS, dMV is set 1 (except PD_SI block, MV is set 0) and output value MV is
not changed (if DB is equal to DBHYS, dMV is not 0 for the action of deviation deadband); When
deviation EI is greater than DB, the deadband action is disabled and output value is added dMV,
shown as follows.

Figure 2-8 Deviation deadband action

When the deviation deadband action switch SWDB is ON, deviation deadband action is enabled.
When SWDB is OFF, deviation deadband action is disabled.

2) Bypass action

21
 Function Block Reference

Bypass action is available only in auto or cascade mode.

When STOPI is ON, integral action is unavailable. Only PID, PI_PLS and PI_AE function block
have integral stop function.

When STOPP is ON, integral action is not available.

When bypass output is calculated (BYPASS=ON), output MV= (SV-SVSCL)* range conversion
coefficient+ MVSCL.

SV——Set value

SVSCL——Low limit of set value range,

MVSCL——Low limit of output value range.

3) PID single function stop

When STOPI=ON, the integral action is not executed, function blocks PID, PI_PLS, PI_AE, PIDEX,
PID_TP, LEPID and PIDEP have the integral stop function.

When STOPP=ON, the proportional action is not executed.

When TD is 0, the derivative action is disabled.

Similarly, P, I action controlled in PI_PLS and PI_AE can be disabled. P, D action controlled in
PD_SI can be disabled. Bypass action of function blocks is available only in the control calculation
stage and does not affect these values in the holding stage.

4) Deviation process

 Direct or reverse action

When set value SV is fixed and direct action is available, increment of PV will cause MV value to
increase; when reverse action is available, increment of PV will cause MV value to decrease.
Direct action (SWPN=OFF) and reverse action (SWPN=ON) can be selected by parameter
SWPN.

When direct action is available:

EI= PV-SV;

When reverse action is available:

EIR = SVR – PVR;

 Deviation alarm

22
 Function Block Reference

When absolute value of deviation EI is greater than absolute value of set value of deviation DLp,
deviation alarm is generated. When EI is greater than DL, positive deviation alarm (PEI) is
generated. When EI is less than -DLp, negative deviation alarm (NEI) is generated. There is alarm
deadband action (DLHYS) when deviation is recovered, shown as follows.

Figure 2-9 Error alarm process

In order to avoid deviation alarm caused by mutation of set value, the value r got by filtering the set
value is used as compensation coefficient of deviation alarm set value (DL). Deviation set value
compensated (DLp) is deviation alarm set value DL adding compensation coefficient r, shown as
follows.

23
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-10 Diagram of deviation alarm

Expression of set value filter: r ( s)  K SV * TSV s * SV ( s)

1  TSV s

K SV * TSV ( SVn  SVn 1 )  TSV * rn 1

Expression after discretion: rn 
TS  TSV

5) Output compensation

Output compensation is used to add the compensation value got outside to the output signal MV
calculated by the control block. Expression: MV=MV0+OK (OA+OB).

Output compensation is mainly used to add feedforward signal to output signal to achieve
feedforward function.

6) Control output

Increment dMV output in this period is got by PID calculation. dMV should be conversed to the
actual output value MV in this period. There are commonly two output modes: increment and
position.

 Increment

New output value is got by adding increment dMV of the current output value to feedback input
BKIN. Expression: MV = dMV+BKIN.

 Position

New output value MV is got by adding increment dMV of the current output value to output value
LMV of last time. Expression: MV = dMV+LMV.

24
 Function Block Reference

Output mode option OUT_OPT: when OUT_OPT is OFF, position output is selected. When
OUT_OPT is ON, increment output is selected.

7) Range conversion

For general control function block, set value commonly has the same range as process value and
output value is in another range. Because range is inconsistent, the input range should be mapped
to the output range. The mapping coefficient is called range conversion coefficient KS.

Expression:

MVSCH  MVSCL
Ks 
SVSCH  SVSCL

If process value is PV, the PV is mapped to MV. The value is equal to:

MV= (PV-SVSCL)*KS+MVSCL

For ratio function block, because SV is conversion coefficient, SV is not required to converse
range. Only process value PV is conversed range.

8) Integral limit action

In control calculation of PID, PI_PLS, PI_AE, PIDEX, PID_TP, LEPID and PIDEP, the integral item
is the integral of deviation for time, the integral saturation is easily cased, and the control results
may cause overshoot and lead to unsteady process. The integral limit action is used to limit the
integral item and prevented from the integral saturation.

BKIN and RRL are used to updating calculation to dMV. When MV is limited to between MVH and
'
MVL, integral limit action acts on integral item of MV of before amplitude limiting.

T
dMVn  dMVn 0  ( BKIN  RRL  MV ' n 1 )
TI

dMVn 0 : operating output gain value (before updating) in PID, PI_PLS, PI_AE calculation

MV ' n 1 : operating output value (before output amplitude limiting) in last time calculation.

25
 Function Block Reference

2.1.5 Output Process

Figure 2-11 Output process of control function block

1) Preset MV process

If mode of last period is OOS, IMAN, TR, MAN and mode of this period is AUTO or CAS and
SWPMV=ON, MV=PMV. In this case, MV velocity alarm, lock increase/decrease/maintain are
unavailable.

If mode of last period is not MAN mode and mode of this period is MAN mode and SWMMV=ON,
MV=MMV.

2) Output limit and alarm

When output value is over its limit, the output is limited, and alarm is generated. High limit of output
limit (MVH) must be greater than or equal to low limit of output limit (MVL). Otherwise, output limit
alarm is disabled and the configuration error alarm (CFGERR) is generated.

Output maximum MVH must be less than HORLIM*(MVSCH-MVSCL)/100 + MVSCH and output
minimum MVL must be greater than

MVSCL-LORLIM*(MVSCH-MVSCL)/100.

3) Output velocity limit and alarm

When change velocity of output is over change limit, the output is limited, and alarm is generated.
Velocity limit is only available in mode of auto and cascade. In mode of auto and cascade, when
change velocity of output MV is over velocity limit DMVLIM, an alarm is generated. When the
velocity increased of MV is over DMVLIM, positive velocity alarm is generated, i.e., DMVHIND=ON;
When the velocity decreased of MV is over DMVLIM, negative velocity alarm is generated, i.e.,

26
 Function Block Reference

DMVLIND=ON. When the velocity is over limit, output is increased or decreased according to the
velocity limit.

4) Lock increase/decrease/maintain (invalid for RATIO and split control)

In the mode of auto and cascade, lock increase/decrease can be implemented for MV.

 Lock increase

 When SWING=ON, lock increase. Output MV cannot be increased.

 Lock decrease

 When SWDEC=ON, lock decrease. Output MV cannot be decreased.

 Output maintain

 In the mode of auto and cascade, when HOLD is equal to ON, output is maintained.
2.1.6 Alarm
1) Alarm enabled and alarm

 Alarm enabled

Alarms can be enabled by ENALM. The type of ENALM is ALMTYPE. For example, PID function
block can be set initial value of alarm enabled under "Function block properties/Alarm Enabled
and Suppress", shown as follows.

27
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-12 Alarm enable setting

When an alarm is selected, the alarm is enabled. The alarm not selected will be shielded.

When the function block is debugged, the alarm enabled option can be modified in real time under
"Function Block Parameter Debug", shown as follows.

28
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-13 Modify alarm enable

 Alarm

29
 Function Block Reference

The parameter Alarm in Extended Parameters can be data excerpt. Details of data excerpt refer to
the VFFBDBuilder User Manual.

If the alarm is selected in the panel, when it occurs, it shows in the detail alarm area in the panel,
and the real-time value in the function block parameter debug interface shows ON.

1) Flag code parse of general control function block list is shown below.

Table 2-2 Flag code list

RATI
Name symbols skewing PID PI_PLS PD_SI PI_AE SPLIT
O
FB Disable OOS 0 √ √ √ √ √ √
Manual Initialization IMAN 1 √ √ √ √ √ √
Manual MAN 2 √ √ √ √ √ √
Tracking TR 3 √ √ √ √ √ √
Automatic AUTO 4 √ √ √ √ √ √
Cascade CAS 5 √ √ √ √ √ √
High Limit Alarm of Output
MVH1 8 - - - - - √
1
Low Limit Alarm of Output
MVL1 9 - - - - - √
1
High Limit Alarm of Output
MVH2 10 - - - - - √
2
Low Limit Alarm of Output
MVL2 11 - - - - - √
2
PV HH Alarm PVHH 8 √ √ √ √ √ -
PV LL Alarm PVLL 9 √ √ √ √ √ -
PV High Limit Alarm PVH 10 √ √ √ √ √ -
PV Low Limit Alarm PVL 11 √ √ √ √ √ -
SV High Limit Alarm SVH 12 √ √ √ √ √ √
SV Low Limit Alarm SVL 13 √ √ √ √ √ √
MV High Limit Alarm MVH 14 √ √ √ √ √ -
MV Low Limit Alarm MVL 15 √ √ √ √ √ -
Positive Deviation Alarm PEI 16 √ √ √ √ -
Minus Deviation Alarm NEI 17 √ √ √ √ -
High/Low Limit Reversal
REVSCL 18 √ √ √ √ √ √
Alarm for Alarm
Alarm for Config Error CFGERR 19 √ √ √ √ √ √
Alarm for Control Deviation
AEH 20 - - - √ - -
is High
Alarm for Control Deviation
AEL 21 - - - √ - -
is Low
Alarm for MV Velocity High
DMVH 22 √ √ √ √ √ -
Limit
Alarm for MV Velocity
DMVL 23 √ √ √ √ √ -
Amplitude Limiting is Low
Valve Position Minus
NMF 27 √ √ √ √ - -
Deviation Alarm
Valve Position Positive
PMF 28 √ √ √ √ - -
Deviation Alarm

30
 Function Block Reference

2) Alarm for range high/low limit reversal

When SVSCH<SVSCL or MVSCH<MVSCL, alarm for range high/low limit reversal (REVSCL) is
generated.

3) Alarm for Config Error

When alarm limit of SV or MV is reversed, configuration error (CFGERR) alarm will be generated,
limit will not work.

4) Valve position deviation alarm

DVLV= MV-MF.

If DVLV<0 and absolute value of DVLV is greater than NMFLIM in TMFHYS seconds, NMF alarm
is generated.

If DVLV>0 and absolute value of DVLV is greater than PMFLIM in TMFHYS seconds, PMF alarm
is generated.

2.1.7 Others
1) BKOUT

When BK_OPT is ON, BKOUT tracks the process value. When BK_OPT is OFF, BKOUT tracks
the set value.

2) Fast increase and fast decrease (invalid for RATIO and split control)

There are buttons of fast increase, fast decrease, slow increase and slow decrease on the panel,
by which MV or SV can be modified.

 MODE=MAN

In this case, the four buttons on the panel are valid for MV. Value (engineering unit) of fast increase
or decrease is equal to (MVSCH-MVSCL) *FMV/100 and value of slow increase or decrease is
equal to (MVSCH-MVSCL) *SMV/100.

 MODE=AUTO

In this case, the four buttons are valid for SV. Value of fast increase or decrease is equal to
(SVSCH-SVSCL) *FSV/100 and value of slow increase or decrease is equal to (SVSCH-SVSCL)
*SSV/100.

The four buttons are invalid in other modes.

3) Select manual and auto signal source and auto and cascade signal source

31
 Function Block Reference

Manual and auto signal source can be selected by parameter MAN_OPT. When MAN_OPT is ON,
it is controlled by PSWAM. When MAN_OPT is OFF, it is controlled by SWAM.

Auto and cascade signal source can be selected by parameter SV_OPT. When SV_OPT is ON, it
is controlled by PSWSV. When SV_OPT is OFF, it is controlled by SWSV.

4) Decimal digits

Decimal digits configuration of SVDLEN and MVDLEN referred in the control function block library
is used to display data in the function block panel.

2.1.8 PID Parameter Tune

The proportional control is a basic control method and has the control effect corresponding to
derivation. PB selection largely affects the control performance of the system. Decrease of PB can
improve the control precision, shorten the respond time and speed up the respond action, while
reduce the stability. Adjustment for PB should consider these two indexes.

The integral action weakens with the increase of TI. Adding integral control can eliminate the
residual error which cannot be eliminated by pure proportional control, while reduce the system
stability. PB should be added to keep the original attenuation ratio of system, which will reduce the
other control indexes of system. Thus the proportional action should not be added if the
attenuation ratio is not the main control index.

Adding differential control can suppress at the moment of fast variation interference for the system
and increase its stability. The differential action is strengthened with the increase of the differential
time TD. Proper differential action can improve the control quality, while overlarge differential will
cause uncontrollable strict shock.

Integral and differential should be used with proportional action.

1) Experience Tune

It is an actually trial and error of experience. It needs no advance calculation and experiment,
while determines a group of control parameter first according to the running experience, starts the
system operation, through observing the transition process curve after adding man-made
interference (changing the set value), to change the corresponding control parameter value
according to the various effects of different control actions on the transition process, and to
perform repeat trial and error till the satisfying control quality is obtained.

Table 2-3 Experience data for controller parameter

Proportional Band Differential Time

Controlled Variable Rule Selection Integral Time TI/s
PB (%) TD/s

32
 Function Block Reference

Proportional Band Differential Time

Controlled Variable Rule Selection Integral Time TI/s
PB (%) TD/s
Object time constant is
small, parameter has
variation, PB should be
Flow 40~100 18~60 -
large; TI should be
short; differential is not
used
Object volume lag is
large, means the
parameter variation
becoming slow with
Temperature 20~60 180~600 30~180
interference, PB should
be small; TI should be
long; differential should
be added generally
Object volume lag is not
Pressure rather large, differential 30~70 24~180 -
is not added generally
Object time constant
range is large, the
requirements are not
Fluid Level high, PB can be 20~80 - -
selected in a range,
differential is not used
generally

As the proportional action is the basic control action, the experience tune meets the quality index
mainly by adjusting proportional band PB. There are two ways to tune:

2) First use the pure proportional (P) action, means to find the proper proportional band PB,
and change the transition process after adding man-made interference to the attenuation
oscillation process of 4:1. Then add integral action (I), and take the integral time TI as a
half of the attenuation oscillation cycle. As the integral action enhances the oscillation,
the proportional action should be weakened before adding integral action, and enlarge
10%~20% of the proportional band generally. Adjust the integral time till the 4:1
attenuation oscillation occurs. Add differential (D) action if needed, means to start from 0
and enlarge the differential time TD gradually. As the differential action can suppress the
oscillation, the proportional band can be adjusted to be less than pure proportional action
before adding integral action, and shorten the integral time. The transition time can be
adjusted to be shortest and the overshoot to be smallest via the trial and error of
differential time.

3) Select integral time TI and differential time TD, take TD= (1/3~1/4) TI generally. Perform
repeat trial and error for the proportional band PB till the satisfying result is obtained. The
satisfying curve may not be obtained if the setting of TI and TD are not proper at
beginning. Then adjust TI and TD properly and perform trial and error again to meet the
curve to the control requirements.

The experience tune method applies to various control system, especially the control system with
frequent object interference and irregular transition process curve. However, it will cost more time
for operator lacking of experience.

33
 Function Block Reference

1. Critical Proportional Band

Critical proportional band refers to obtain critical oscillation data in the method of pure proportional
control in the system closed loop, means the critical proportional band PBk and the critical
oscillation cycle Tk, and use some experience formulas to get the controller parameter meeting the
4:1 attenuation oscillation process. The steps are shown below.

1) Set the integral time of controller as maximum (TI=∞), differential time as minimum
(TD=0), proportional band PB behind a comparatively large value, and start system
operation.

2) Reduce the proportional band gradually. Exert stage interference for the system via
changing the set value once the PB value is modified, and observe the output of system
till the continuous oscillation occurs to the transition process. The transition process here
called critical oscillation process. PBk is critical proportional band and Tk is critical
oscillation cycle.

3) Use two testing data PBk and Tk and by the corresponding formula to figure out various
tune parameters of controller.

Table 2-4 Controller parameter calculation in critical proportional band method (attenuation ratio 4:1)

Control Rule Proportional Band PB (%) Integral Time TI/s Differential Time TD/s
P 2PBk - -
PI 2.2PBk 51Tk -
PD 1.8PBk - 6Tk
PID 1.7PBk 30Tk 7.5Tk

4) Change the proportional band of controller to the tuned value, and put the tune of integral
time and differential time successively.

2. Attenuation Curve

It is a little like the tune process of critical proportional band method, means set the integral time as
maximum in closed loop system, the differential time as minimum and the proportional time as
comparatively large value, then input the change of set value as interference, decrease the
proportional band PB value gradually, and observe the output response curve of the system.
Change the PB value according to the attenuation of transition process till the 4:1 attenuation
oscillation. Record the proportional band PBs and the attenuation oscillation cycle Ts, and figure
out the tune parameter of controller via the corresponding experience formula.

Control Rule Proportional Band PB (%) Integral Time TI/s Differential Time TD/s
P PBs - -
PI 1.2PBs 30Ts -
PID 0.8PBs 18Ts 6Ts

The attenuation curve method can apply to most systems. For its short test transition process
oscillation time, and all are attenuation oscillation, it is acceptable for operator. Thus this kind of
tune method is widely used.

34
 Function Block Reference

2.1.9 Difference between Various PID Function Blocks

Table 2-5 Difference of PID Function Blocks

Difference Item PID PIDEP PIDEX EPID LEPID

OOS, IMAN, OOS, IMAN, TR,
Supported Operation OOS, IMAN, OOS, AUTO, OOS, TR,
TR, MAN, MAN, AUTO,
Mode AUTO CAS AUTO
AUTO, CAS CAS
PID Algorithm PID, D_PI,
PID, D_PI, PD_I PID, D_PI, PD_I PID PID
Selection PD_I
SV Ramp Action √ √ √ － －
SV Track Action √ √ √ － －
Proportional
√ √ √ － －
Nonlinear Gain
Integral Cutting √ √ √ － －
Wind-up √ √ √ － －
PID Single Function Stop P, I, D Stop P, I, D Stop P, I, D
－ －
Stop Separately Separately Separately
Bypass √ √ √ － －
Lock
Increase/Decrease
√ √ √ － √
and Maintain

Position
type, Position Type, Position
MV Output Mode Position Type Position Type
Increment Increment Type Type
Type
Electrical
Recommended Electrical Power General Electrical
General Power
Industry Industry (recommended) Power Industry
Industry

2.2 General PID Function Block (PID)

The PID general function block can perform PID adjustment function based on the D-value of PV
and SV, can provide three kinds of control modes PID, PV PD_I and PV D_PI via parameter
setting, and provide output of increment type or position type for different control objects.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 120μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

35
 Function Block Reference

2.2.1 Parameter Instruction

Details of various parameters setting refer to the 1.4 Parameter Sort of Function Block.

The data type, initial value and default pin of function block parameter in the table below refer to
the function properties setting interface.

When the parameter in the table below is uploaded as TRUE, it means the corresponding
parameter can upload the data of controller and save to the configuration later. When offline
download is performed next time, the saved data can be downloaded.

Table 2-6 Parameter instruction and application of PID Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Configuration The same as MV
MVSCH MV high scale －
Parameters Parameter actual value H limit
Configuration The same as MV
MVSCL MV low scale －
Parameter actual value L limit
Configuration The same as PV
SVSCH SV high scale －
Parameter actual value H limit
Configuration The same as PV
SVSCL SV low scale －
Parameter actual value L limit
Set in the function
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
setting interface
Range
Setting Set in the function
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
setting interface
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuration
SVDLEN － function block panel
[0,5] Parameter
(equal to 3 as
default)
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuration
MVDLEN － function block panel
[0,5] Parameter
(equal to 3 as
default)
Operation Value range
MVH MV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
MVL MV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVH SV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Operation Value range
Limits SVL SV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
MV output rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent
Operation Refer to 2.1.6
DMVLIM the MV from TRUE
Parameter
overlarge
modification in a
short time.

36
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with the
Direct/Rev
increasing of PV Operation OFF=Direct action,
erse Switch SWPN TRUE
in direct action, Parameter ON=Reverse action
Settings
and decreases
with the
increasing of PV
in reverse action.
Extended Connect to BKOUT
Parameters BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin of downstream
block
Connect to
Feedback status
BKINERR － Input Pin BKOUTERR of
input
downstream block
Process value of
Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin
measuring point AI
control process
Connect to outer
CSV Cascade － Input Pin loop control value
Base Input MV
Pin Connect to
Track input value
Settings measuring point AI,
TV (in track mode, － Input Pin
Related parameter:
MV=TV)
SWTR
Upstream interlock
Track switch:
condition input,
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin
related parameter:
ON=track
TV
Connect to
Output
measuring point AI
compensation,
(feedforward
OA used for － Input Pin
signal),
feedforward
related parameters:
control
OK, OB
Advance Executor
Input Pin feedback value , Connect to
MF － Input Pin
Settings used for measuring point AI
monitoring
Input
compensation Connect to
value, used to measuring point AI,
IA improve the － Input Pin refer to 1.1.2
controllability of Related
process with long parameters: IK, IB
deadband time
Program manual
and auto control
Connect to
switch,
upstream output,
PSWAM OFF=program － Input Pin
valid when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=ON
ON=program auto
control

37
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Program auto/ Connect to
cascade control upstream output,
PSWSV － Input Pin
switch, OFF= SV, valid when
ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automatic
control source
switch, ON=
manual-automatic
Connect to
selection
MAN_OP upstream output,
controlled by － Input Pin
T related parameters:
PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM, SWAM
manual-automatic
selection
controlled by
SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON=
auto/cascade
Connect to
selection
upstream output,
SV_OPT controlled by － Input Pin
related parameters:
PSWSV, OFF=
PSWSV, SWSV
auto/cascade
selection
controlled by
SWSV
Connect to
Lock increase for
upstream output,
MV (MV cannot
SWINC － Input Pin valid when function
Increase), ON=
block is automatic
lock increase
or cascade
Connect to
Anti-integral
measuring point AI,
saturation input,
RRL － Input Pin related parameters:
used for control
BKIN
overshoot
Refer to 2.1.4
Connect to
Lock decrease for
upstream output,
MV (MV cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin valid when function
decrease), ON=
block is automatic
Lock decrease
or cascade
Hold the current Connect to
output value for upstream output,
HOLD MV, ON= hold the － Input Pin valid when function
current output block is automatic
value or cascade
Output Pin Operation output Connect to electric
MV － Output Pin
value for PID manual instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of Upstream
Feedback output
BKOUT － Output Pin Block,
value
Related Parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback status BKINERR of
－ Output Pin
RR value Upstream Block

38
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
BKOUT value
switch (ON=track Configuration Related parameter:
BK_OPT －
PV, OFF=track Parameter BKOUT
SV)
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
PID Param When TD=0,
Setting Operation suppress derivation
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Parameter action
Refer to 2.1.8
Note1, Note2,
Derivative filter Operation Refer to
KD TRUE Note3, Note4
coefficient Parameter
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.2.1
Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.2.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_O Configuration
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.2.1
PT Parameter
return (default)
Manual and auto
switch: Operation Valid when
SWAM －
OFF=manual, Parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Valid when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to equal
to preset MV Operation Related parameter:
SWMMV TRUE
value when switch Parameter MMV
Operator to manual status
Command Preset MV value Operation Valid when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON
Whether to equal
to preset MV
value when switch
to auto status.
PMV enable
switch. When Operation Related parameter:
SWPMV TRUE
SWPMV=ON, MV Parameter PMV
= PMV, MV
velocity alarm,
lock
increase/decreas
e are disabled
Preset MV when
switching from
OOS/IMAN/TR/M Operation Valid when
PMV TRUE
AN modes to Parameter SWPMV=ON
AUTO or CAS
mode
Operator SV for loop closed Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
Data control Parameter

39
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Manual output Operation MV = MANMV in
MANMV －
value Parameter manual mode

Monitoring
EI Deviation － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter

PV HH limit alarm Operation

PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV alarm Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Input Alarm hystersis value Parameter
Settings Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant (s) Parameter
Valve position Related parameter:
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE NMF
Parameter
thresholds Refer to 2.1.6
Valve position Related parameter:
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE PMF
Parameter
thresholds Refer to 2.1.6
Valve position
positive error
Operation
TMFHYS Valve position TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
error alarm
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
operation, when When cascade
Advance BYPASS=ON, adjusting, used to
Calculation Operation
BYPASS excise PID TRUE excise inner loop
Settings Parameter
calculation, switch when it fails
SV to MV directly Refer to 2.1.4
for output
Proportion
suppress switch,
Operation
STOPP when TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
STOPP=ON, stop
integral action
Integral suppress
switch, when
Operation
STOPI STOPI=ON, TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
stop integral
action
Enable switch,
Operation Related parameter:
SWDB when SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter DB
deadband enable

40
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Deadband band Operation Valid when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range
Non-linear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient [0,1.0] Parameter
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the relation
between error and
output change Related
value to nonlinear. parameters: GW,
NGN_OP Used for control Configuration PB and KN When
－
T when proportional Parameter NGN_OPT＝ON;
gain needs GW and PB when
nonlinear change. NGN_OPT＝OFF
OFF=Error square
root function,
ON=Gap action
function
Integral excise
coefficient. when
EI > EA, excise
coefficient, when
EI< EA, excising Operation Related parameter:
EA TRUE
coefficient is Parameter DK
disabled, used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion
modified value Operation Related parameter:
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter EA
Note5
excising
Control output
type:
Related parameter:
OUT_OP OFF=position Configuration
－ MV
T type, Parameter
Refer to 2.1.4
ON=increment
type
When PID_OPT ＝
0, use standard PID
Note2
algorithm ; when
PID_OPT＝1, use
Configuration
PID_OPT PID type selection － PV D_PI
Parameter Note4
algorithm ; when
PID_OPT＝2, use
PV proportional
Note3
PD_I algorithm
Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter

41
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position
Monitoring
NMFIND error negative － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Valve position
Monitoring
PMFIND error positive － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE related parameter:
Parameter
gain IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IB compensation TRUE related parameter:
Parameter
Compensat bias value IA
ion Settings Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OK compensation TRUE related parameter:
Parameter
gain OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation TRUE related parameter:
Parameter
bias value OA
Set MV manual
Fase/Slow/ slow
Increase/D Manual slow
Operation increase/decrease
ecrease SMV increase/decreas TRUE
Parameter percentage in
Settings e value (%)
function block
properties setting
Set MV manual fast
Manual fast increase/decrease
Operation
FMV increase/decreas TRUE percentage in
Parameter
e value (%) function block
properties setting
Set SV manual slow
SV slow increase/decrease
Operation
SSV increase/decreas TRUE percentage in
Parameter
e value (%) function block
properties setting

42
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set SV manual fast
SV fast increase/decrease
Operation
FSV increase/decreas TRUE percentage in
Parameter
e value (%) function block
properties setting
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage
SV ramp function
switch. When
changing SV,
Related parameter:
incline it to SV
RAMP,
according to the Operation
SWRAMP TRUE valid when in
set RAMP (s). Parameter
automatic or
OFF=SV ramp
cascade mode
function off,
ON=SV ramp
function on
SV Operation Related parameter:
RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE
Advance Parameter SWRAMP
Settings SV track PV
switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVTR_O SVH/ SVL, SV= Configuration
－ Refer to 2.1.3
PT range limit. Used Parameter
to prevent the
output MV from
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Suppress module
Operation
Alarm AOF alarm, on=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
Enabled to display alarm
and Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Suppress Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Function block Set as ON at the
Operation
SWOOS disable TRUE first time of function
Parameter
(ON=disable) block downloading
Output value in Operation Related parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
OOS status Parameter OOS_OPT=ON
OOS Output value type
Settings in OOS status.
when OOS_OPT
OOS_OP =ON, Configuration Refer to 1.1.1
－
T MV=OOSVAL, Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV
Check Enable switch for
Operation
Input SWPV checking PV TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
Validity validity

43
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PV change limit Operation
PVLMT TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
(%) Parameter

Note 1: PID Algorithm

Figure 2-14 General PID function block algorithm

There are three control modes for the function block, including PID, PV PD_I and PV D_PI.

Note 2: Standard PID control algorithm (PID)

The mode mainly applies to produce process with big time parameter and control of instantaneous
response caused by change of set value.

Calculation expression:

100  T 
MVn   E n  S E n  U n 
PB  TI 

In the above, E n  E n  E n 1

U n  U n  U n 1

TD
Un  [U n 1  K D ( E n  E n 1 )]
K D TS  TD

TS: attenuation oscillation cycle

KD: differential filter coefficient

Note 3: PV PD_I (PD_I)

44
 Function Block Reference

The mode is different from standard PID control algorithm. Change of set value does not influence
action of proportion and differential coefficient even if mutation of set value cannot cause dramatic
change of output by which stable control Properties can be obtained.

Calculation expression:

100  T 
MVn   PVn  S E n  U n 
PB  TI 

In the above, PVn  PVn  PVn 1

U n  U n  U n 1

TD
Un  [U n 1  K D ( PVn  PVn 1 )]
K D TS  T D

Note 4: PV D_PI (D_PI)

Only proportion action and integral action are implemented in this mode when the set value is
changed. The algorithm mainly applies to the field which needs to track set value, such as salve
loop of cascade control loop.

Calculation expression:

100  T 
MVn   E n  S E n  U n 
PB  TI 

In the above, E n  E n  E n 1

U n  U n  U n 1

TD
Un  [U n 1  K D ( PVn  PVn 1 )]
K D TS  TD

Note 5: Integral Cutting

In the PID control calculation, it will lead to system overshoot and oscillating when start, stop or SV
go up and down by a large margin and appear large deviation in little time. For this reason,
introduce integral cutting strategy. When the deviation less-than setting value EA, plunge into
integral function. In order to keep stability of system, diminution proportion gain with plunge
integral function, and add a gain factor DK to the proportional gain with integral cutting when error
is reduced to beneath EA, perform integral action and restore the original proportional gain to
achieve it.

45
 Function Block Reference

To make sure the stability of system after performing integral action, the proportional gain should
reduce. When cutting the integral action, the proportional gain should be KP+DK.

Note 6: Incomplete differential action of PID

Computer control can help to achieve ideal differential control. However, the PID control result of
ideal differential is not perfect, especially for the production process with high frequency
interference. Over-sensitive differential action will generate process oscillation of the process.
Thus, the real PID controller is often applied, which adds first order inertia link to the ideal
differential link. The transmission function of the algorithm is:

 
MV ( s ) 100  1 TD * s 
 1   
E (s) PB  TI * s 1  TD s 
 
 KD 

46
 Function Block Reference

2.2.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

47
 Function Block Reference

Table 2-7 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name
PV HH alarm value setting of loop
Preference [SVSCL,SVS
Alarm HH PVHH 100.000 PV (select alarm enabled, or it
CH]
(%) is disabled).
H alarm value setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVS
H PVH 90.000 PV(select alarm enabled, or it
CH]
is disabled)
L alarm value setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVS
L PVL 10.000 PV(select alarm enabled, or it
CH]
is disabled)

48
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name
LL alarm value setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVS
LL PVLL 0.000 PV. (select alarm enabled, or it
CH]
is disabled)
PV Process value alarm
HYS PVHYS 0.000 -
hysteresis
H value setting of loop SV
(select alarm enabled, or it is
[SVSCL,SVS
H SVH 40.000 disabled).
CH]
Note: SV limit is not affected by
SV selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of loop SV
(select alarm enabled, or it is
[SVSCL,SVS
L SVL 0.000 disabled).
CH]
Note: SV limit is not affected by
selection.
H value setting of loop MV
(select alarm enabled, or it is
[MVSCL,MVS
H MVH 100.000 disabled).
CH]
Note: MV limit is not affected by
MV selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of loop MV
(select alarm enabled, or it is
[MVSCL,MVS
L MVL 0.000 disabled).
CH]
Note: MV limit is not affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=SV-PV (select
EI EI 0.000 － alarm enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI
Selecting the positive deviation
(sele － － －
alarm is enabled.
EI cted)
Alarm NEI
(%) Selecting the negative
(sele － － －
deviation alarm is enabled.
cted)
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
DLH
DLHYS 0.000 － Deviation alarm hystersis value
YS
Selecting the positive deviation
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 －
alarm is enabled.
MF
Alarm Selecting the negative
NMF NMFLIM 100.000 －
(%) deviation alarm is enabled.
TMF
TMFHYS 0.000 － Lag time SV
HYS
DMV
H Selecting positive velocity
－ － －
(sele alarm is enabled.
MV cted)
Velocity DMV
Limits L Selecting negative velocity
(%) － － －
(sele alarm is enabled.
cted)
DMV
DMVLIM 100.000 － Loop MV velocity limit SV
LIM

49
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name

PID PB Not less than Loop proportional parameter

PB 100.000
(%) 0 SV
PID
Param Not less than Loop integral time parameter
TI(s) TI 20.000
eter 0 SV
TD(s Not less than Loop differential time
TD 0.000
) 0 parameter SV
Incomp
lete
Differe KD(s Not less than Incomplete integral filter
KD 10.000
ntial ) 0 coefficient
Param
eter
Ena
ble Selecting deadband parameter
SWDB － －
(sele is enabled.
cted)
Deadb Disa
and ble Selecting deadband parameter
SWDB √ －
(%) (sele is disabled.
cted)
DB DB 0.000 － Deadband band size
DBH
DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB] Deadband band hysteresis
YS
Gap
Actio Read-only, non-linear gain
NGN_OP
n － － selection switch
T
(sele ON= Gap Action
cted)
Non-lin
ear Squ
Gain are Read-only, non-linear gain
NGN_OP
(%) Root √ － selection switch
T
(sele OFF=Square Root Action
cted)
GW GW 0.000 [0,1.0] Nonlinear gain action range
KN KN 1.000 － Nonlinear gain coefficient
EA EA 0.000 － Range parameter SV
Integral Integral excising coefficient.
Separa When EI>EA, integral excising
tion (%) DK DK 0.000 －
enabled; when EI<EA, integral
excising disabled.
Ena
ble
SWRAMP － － Selecting SV ramp is enabled.
(sele
SV cted)
Ramp Disa
Action ble
(%) SWRAMP √ － Selecting SV ramp is disabled.
(sele
cted)
RAM
RAMP 100.000 － Coefficient parameter SV
P

50
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name
Dire
ct Selecting direct action is
SWPN － －
(sele enabled.
Control cted)
Directio
n Rev
erse Selecting reverse action is
SWPN √ －
(sele enabled.
cted)
Run
Selecting proportional action is
Proport (sele STOPP √ －
enabled.
ional cted)
Action Selecting proportional action is
Stop STOPP － －
disabled.
Selecting integral action is
Run STOPI √ －
enabled.
Integral
Action Selecting integral action is
Stop STOPI － －
disabled.

The modification of function

block panel is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block properties
interface when debugging.
PID
The modification of function
Bypa block panel is disabled for
BYPASS － －
ss function block properties
interface when debugging.

Others Input Read-only, can be set in

IA IA 0.000 －
Compe configuration or program
nsation IK IK 1.000 － Input compensation gain
(%)
IB IB 0.000 － Input compensation bias value

Output OA OA 0.000 － Read-only, feedforward signal

Compe OK OK 1.000 － Output compensation gain
nsation
(%) Output compensation bias
OB OB 0.000 －
value
Bias KSV KSV 1.000 0~100 Deviation filter coefficient
Alarm
Filter TSV 0~1000s filter
Setting TSV 0.000 Constant between errors (s)
(s) time
s
Feedba Read-only, can be set in
PV BK_OPT － -
ck configuration or program
Output Read-only, can be set in
Track SV BK_OPT √ -
configuration or program
Trac SVTR_O Read-only, can be set in
√ -
k PT configuration or program
SV
Track Not
SVTR_O Read-only, can be set in
Trac － -
PT configuration or program
k
MAN_ Pan MAN_OP Read-only, can be set in
√ -
OPT el T configuration or program

51
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range Application Instruction
Paramete
r Name
Setting Prog MAN_OP Read-only, can be set in
－ -
ram T configuration or program
SV_OP Pan Read-only, can be set in
SV_OPT － -
T el configuration or program
Setting Prog Read-only, can be set in
s SV_OPT √ -
ram configuration or program

Read-only, track input value

TV (%) TV 0.000 －
(%)

Executive
MF 0.0 [MVH,MVL] Writable
Feedback

2.2.3 Flag
Table 2-8 Flag

Flag Instruction
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22
(DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23
(DMVL)
D27 Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation (NMF)

52
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D28 Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.2.4 Application Example

Example 1: PID single loop control

Cold water becomes hot water after heated up by steam heater. It needs to control the
temperature of hot water by adjusting steam flow. Suppose the hot water temperature TT is
measured by tag TT001, the steam flow FC is adjusted by FC001. The hot water control strategy
is that the PID function block takes hot water temperature as input and outputs a signal to AO
block, then AO block sends control signal to the steam supply valve, as shown below.

Figure 2-15 Hot water temperature PID control diagram

The program of FBD is shown below. When using PID function block, connect its input pins BKIN
and BKINERR with output pins BKOUT and BKOUTERR of downstream block. If the down stream
block is AO, it needs data interference for connection.

Figure 2-16 Single loop closed loop control program

53
 Function Block Reference

PID function block parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings interface).

 PID_OPT: 0

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: ℃

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag TT001)

 SVSCL: (＝range L value of tag TT001)

 MVEU: m3 /s

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

When debugging program, run the monitoring software, invoke the function block panel and open
the adjusting interface. If the function block is in IMAN mode, review the tag information of FC001,
and adjust the status of FC001 until FC001.BKOUTERR=OFF, and the SteamHeater is in MAN
mode. It can be switched manually.

Example 2: Feedforward control

In example 1, the thermal lag between cold and hot water will generate time lag and affect the
control. For example, if the steam supply reduces, the temperature of output hot water will be
lower than set.

The interference can be checked out before it is reflected to the hot water test point, and
participated into the PID calculation as the output compensation to eliminate its effect by improving
control algorithm. In the following figure, to measure the steam flow (FT001) before control valve
and take it as the feedforward signal to the PID function block. If the steam reduces, the function
block should increase output signal to enlarge the control valve opening. If the steam rises, the
function block should decrease output signal to lessen the control valve opening.

54
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-17 Feedforward control program

The program of FBD is shown below. Add feedforward control in the steam heating system to
improve the input/output hot water temperature response. Send the input steam flow measured
value to AI block and connect to OA of PID block. Set the parameters OK and OB via function
block panel.

Figure 2-18 Feedforward control program

PID function block parameter settings in the program (set in the function block properties settings
interface) includes: PID_OPT, SWPN, SVEU, SVSCH, SVSCL, MVEU, OK, OB, PB, TI, TD, etc.

Example 3: PID cascade control

In example 2, the adjust volume of control valve opening resulted by the steam flow modification

55
 Function Block Reference

should be preset. Another method to resolve the problem of time lag is cascade control, which
does not need the related mathematic model of steam flow modification and control valve opening
adjusting volume. In cascade loop, take the MV of master loop (temperature loop) as the set CSV
of slave loop (steam flow loop). The control strategy is shown below.

Figure 2-19 Cascade control diagram

The FBD program is shown below. Notice the function block number when programming
(executing order).

Figure 2-20 Cascade control program diagram

Function block TempControl parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings
interface):

56
 Function Block Reference

 PID_OPT: 0

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: ℃

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag TT001)

 SVSCL: (＝range L value of tag TT001)

 MVEU: m3 /s

 MVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FT001)

 MVSCL: (＝range L value of tag FT001)

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

Function block FlowControl parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings
interface).

 PID_OPT: 0

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: m3 /s

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FT001)

 SVSCL: (＝range L value of tag FT001)

 MVEU: m3 /s

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

When debugging program, first exit the FlowControl loop and TempControl loop from OOS mode,
debug the FlowControl loop, which is the same as the single loop control, after it finished, switch to
cascade and then debug TempControl.

Example 4: PD_I

It is different from standard PID control algorithm; the variation of set value will not affect the
proportional and differential action. Even the sudden change of set value will not cause the rapid
change of operation output, and can obtain the steady control features easily. It performs
proportional, integral and differential control actions for the modification of controlled process
features and the modification and interference of load, to achieve better control.

The program of FBD is the same as standard PID control. Refer to Figure 2-17 and Figure 2-21.

Parameter setting:

 PID_OPT: 2

57
 Function Block Reference

 Other parameter settings are the same as standard PID control.

Example 5: D_PI

It only performs proportional control and integral control, but no differential control, when the set
value changes, and is mainly used in filed needing better track feature for the change of set value,
for example, the minor loop of cascade control loop.

Parameter setting:

 PID_OPT: 1

 Other parameter settings are the same as standard PID control.

Example 6: PID control with track function

The track action is usually used for the process control beyond normal running range.

In the figure below, the flow control valve is used for controlling flow rate. When the pump is
started, the output flow is small when the pump speed increases. The control valve and function
block cannot work normally at that time. Use the track function and set the valve position at a
preset opening TV, and keep the opening in a set time range.

The pump starting signal connects to the track switch SWTR via the timer, set the time as the track
action time, and set the track value as the needed opening of control valve. When the pump starts
to track, open the valve position to the set value, close the track action after the set time ended,
and the PID adjuster starts normal work and control the valve position to adjust output flow.

Figure 2-21 Track and PID control diagram

FBD program is shown below.

58
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-22 Track and PID control program

PID function block parameter settings related to the program (set in the function block properties
settings interface) include: PID_OPT, SWTR, SVEU, SVSCH, SVSCL, MVEU, PB, TI, TD, etc.

2.3 PIDEP Function Block (PIDEP)

The control function of general PID is available in PIDEP. It has three work modesNote1 OOS, IMAN
and AUTO, and applies to electric power industry.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

Please refer to the Section 1 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.3.1 Parameter Instruction

Details of various parameters setting refer to 1.4.

The data type, initial value and default pin of function block parameter in the table below refer to
the function properties setting interface.

When the parameter in the table below is uploaded as TRUE, it means the corresponding
parameter can upload the data of controller and save to the configuration later. When offline
download is performed next time, the saved data can be downloaded to the controller.

Table 2-9 Parameter instruction and application of PIDEP Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Range Configuration The same as MV
MVSCH MV high scale －
Parameters Settings Parameter actual value H limit.
Configuration The same as MV
MVSCL MV low scale －
Parameter actual value L limit.

59
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Configuration The same as PV
SVSCH SV high scale －
Parameter actual value H limit.
Configuration The same as PV
SVSCL SV low scale －
Parameter actual value L limit.
Set in the function
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Used for data
SV decimal digits Configuration displayed on function
SVDLEN －
[0,5] Parameter block panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
MV decimal digits Configuration displayed on function
MVDLEN －
[0,5] Parameter block panel (equal to
3 as default).
Operation Value range
MVH MV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
MVL MV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVH SV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Operation Value range
Limits SVL SV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
MV output rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent
Operation
DMVLIM the MV from TRUE Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
Direct/R increases with the
everse increasing of PV Operation OFF=Direct action,
SWPN TRUE
Switch in direct action, Parameter ON=Reverse action
Settings and decreases
with the
increasing of PV
in reverse action.
Extended Base Connect to BKOUT
BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
Parameters Input Pin of downstream block
Settings Connect to
Feedback status
BKINERR － Input Pin BKOUTERR of
input
downstream block
Multi-status Connect to
BKINSTA feedback - Input Pin BKOUTSTA of
inputNote4 downstream block
Process value of
Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin
measuring point AI
control process

60
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Setpoint value of
Connect to
SV loop closed － Input Pin
measuring point AI
control process
Output Connect to
compensation, measuring point AI
OA used for － Input Pin (feedforward signal),
feedforward related parameters:
control OK, OB
Input
compensation
Connect to
value, used to
measuring point AI ,
IA improve the － Input Pin
Related parameters:
controllability of
IK, IB
process with long
deadband time
MV lock increase Connect to upstream
(MV cannot output, valid when
SWINC － Input Pin
Increase), ON= function block is
lock increase automatic
MV lock decrease Connect to upstream
(MV cannot output, valid when
SWDEC － Input Pin
decrease), ON= function block is
Lock decrease automatic.
MV hold the
Advance current output
Connect to upstream
Input Pin HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin
output,
the current output
value
PID bypass
operation, when
BYPASS=ON, Bypass action is
Operation
BYPASS excise PID TRUE performed only in
Parameter
calculation, switch auto modeNote2.
SV to MV directly
for output.
Proportion shield
switch, stop Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
proportion action Parameter
when STOPP=ON
Integral shield
switch, stop Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
integral action Parameter
when STOPP=ON

61
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to electric
manual instrument
The MV changes
only when
accumulated
modification of dMV
is more than output
deadband.
PID operation
MV － Output Pin Otherwise, it holds. If
output value
set the deadband as
1, the MV will change
only when the
accumulated
modification is more
than deadband (it is 1
Output when changing from
Pin 30 to 31).
Connect to the BKIN
Feedback output of Upstream Block,
BKOUT － Output Pin
value related Parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
RR value
Upstream Block
Multi-status Connect to the
BKOUTS
feedback - Output Pin BKINSTA of
TA Note5
output Upstream Block
BKOUT value
switch (ON=track Configuration Related parameter:
BK_OPT －
PV, OFF=track Parameter BKOUT
SV)
Monitoring
IMANIND IMAN Status － -
Parameter
Status
Auto status Monitoring
AUTOIND － -
indication Parameter
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
PID
Param When TD=0,
Settings Operation suppress derivation
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Parameter action,
Refer to 2.1.8
Note1,
Derivative filter Operation Refer to 2.2.1
KD TRUE Note2, Note3, Note4
coefficient Parameter

Error
Monitoring
Indicatio EI Deviation － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
n

Input PV HH limit alarm Operation

PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm value Parameter
Settings PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter

62
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant(s) Parameter
Enable switch,
Operation Related parameter:
SWDB when SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter DB
deadband enable
Deadband band Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
Precise controlled Operation
MDB TRUE Refer to Note1
zone range Parameter
Precise controlled
Operation Note1
MK zone coefficient TRUE Refer to
Parameter
Advance [0,1.0]
d Integral excise
Calculati coefficient. when
on EI > EA, excise
Settings coefficient, when
EI< EA, excising Operation Related parameter:
EA TRUE
coefficient is Parameter DK
disabled, used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion
modified value Operation Related parameter:
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter EA
excising
Note1,
Configuration Refer to 2.2.1
PID_OPT PID type selection － Note2, Note3
Parameter

Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring

PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter

63
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE .Related parameter:
Parameter
gain IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IB compensation TRUE .Related parameter:
Compen Parameter
bias value IA
sation
Settings Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OK compensation TRUE .Related parameter:
Parameter
gain OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation TRUE .Related parameter:
Parameter
bias value OA
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extende Parameter
percentage
d Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage
SV ramp function
switch. When
changing set
value, incline it to Related parameter:
SV according to Operation RAMP
SWRAMP TRUE
the set RAMP (s). Parameter Enable when in
OFF=SV ramp automatic mode
function off,
ON=SV ramp
function on
SV Operation Related parameter:
Advance RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE
Parameter SWRAMP
Settings
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
When it is in track
ON=track. If PV>
mode, SV tracks the
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_O Configuration PVR change of PV
range limit. Used －
PT Parameter after input
to prevent the
compensation.
output MV from
Refer to 2.1.3
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Alarm Suppress module
Enabled alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
and On=prohibit to Parameter
Suppres display alarm

64
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
s ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at the first
Operation
SWOOS setting switch TRUE time of function block
Parameter
(ON= OOS mode) downloading
OOS mode output Operation Related parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
value Parameter OOS_OPT=ON
OOS
OOS mode output
Settings
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON,
OOS_OP Configuration
MV=OOSVAL, － Refer to 1.1.1
T Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV
Enable switch for
Operation
Check SWPV checking PV TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
Input validity
Validity PV change limit Operation
PVLMT TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
(%) Parameter

Some of its functions are like PID, and the setting can refer to PID function block, except
followings.

Note 1: Precise control processing

When Mdb>0 and the absolute value of bias after compensation is within precise control zone
(-MDB, MDB), ratio coefficient KP will be corrected as KP=KP×MK. The specific instructions
please refer to PID function block.

Note 2: Bypass action

It works only in AUTO mode. When BYPASS=ON, output as follows:

MV  ( SV  SVSCL)  KS  MVSCL
Note 3: Other

The fallback function should be achieved by users when the function block is connected with
manual operation but not AO tag.

Note 4:

Input pin BKINSTA and output pin BKOUTSTA, data type is USINT. Its meaning is defined by bit,
as shown below.

Table 2-10 Instruction for bits

Data High 2 Bits Data Middle 2 Bits Data Low 2 Bits

Exampl
XX...... ..XXXX.. ......XX
e

65
 Function Block Reference

Data High 2 Bits Data Middle 2 Bits Data Low 2 Bits

******00:
**0000**: Not limited
11******: Middle 4 bits setting as 0
means OK. ******01:
High 2 bits generally
Instruct Low limited
have no special
ion ******10:
meaning, and are set **1111**:
as 1. High limited
Middle 4 bits setting as 1
means Track. ******11:
Constant(low+high)

Status values of BKINSTA and BKOUTSTA combined by definition are shown below, please don’t
use other status values undefined.

Table 2-11 Instruction for status values

Status Instruction (If high 2 bts of system are

BKINSTA/BKOUTSTA Process
always 1, it is cascaded master status.)
11111100(0xFC)

11111101(0xFD)
Track if middle 4 bits are 1. Track (Highest priority)
11111110(0xFE)

11111111(0xFF)

11000000(0xC0) Good Good

11000001(0xC1) Low limited Low limited

11000010(0xC2) High limited High limited

11000011(0xC3) Low limited + High limited Low limited + High limited

Note 5:

Output influence of BKINSTA for PID are shown below. MVLT refers to MV of last period, and dMV
refers to MV increment calculated by PID of current period.

Table 2-12 Feedback pin status process of PIDEP function block

Input Output Response

BKINSTA MV BKOUSTA
GOOD Calculate output MV
(BKINSTA=0xC0) by current mode High 2 bits are set as 1

Middle 4 bits of BKOUSTA are decided by MODE:

MODE != AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Track.
MODE = AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Good.

66
 Function Block Reference

Input Output Response

Low 2 bits of BKOUSTA are set by following rules:
MV limit
MV H limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as Low limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
MV L limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as High limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
SV limit
SV H limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
SV L limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.

Track
High 2 bits are set as 1.
(BKINSTA=0XFC\0xF MV = BKIN
Middle 4 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as Track.
D\0xFE\0xFF)

High 2 bits are set as 1.

Middle 4 bits of BKOUSTA are decided by MODE value:

MODE != AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Track.
MODE = AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Good.

MV lock decrease, i.e. Low 2 bits of BKOUSTA are set by following rules:
only enable increase MV limit
Low limited and disable decrease MV H limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
(BKINSTA=0xC1) (output hold if lock are set as Low limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
increase signal is BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
existing too). MV L limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as High limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
SV limit
SV H limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
SV L limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
High limited MV lock increase, i.e. High 2 bits are set as 1.
(BKINSTA=0xC2) only enable decrease
and disable increase Middle 4 bits of BKOUSTA are decided by MODE value:
(output hold if lock MODE != AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Track.
decrease signal is MODE = AUTO, middle 4 bits are set as Good.

67
 Function Block Reference

Input Output Response

existing too). Low 2 bits of BKOUSTA are set by following rules:
MV limit
MV H limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as Low limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
MV L limit: If PID is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA
are set as High limited. If PID is negative action, low 2 bits of
BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
SV limit
SV H limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as High limited.
SV L limit: No matter positive or negative action for PID, low
2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set as Low limited.
BKINSTA process
If PIDEP is positive action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set
as Low limited.
If PIDEP is negative action, low 2 bits of BKOUTSTA are set
as High limited.

 When calculating BKOUTSTA: if BKINSTA has limit information, and MV or SV is limited,

it superimposes the influence of outputting BKOUSTA, i.e. same priority. The High limited
and Low limited of BKOUTSTA may exist together, i.e. set as Constant.

 When processing BKINSTA, Track has the highest priority. The limit information of
BKINSTA may be invalid only if middle 4 bits are set as Track.

 If High limited and Low limited exist together, output lock increase and decrease are valid
together, output MV hold.

 Lock increase obtained by BKINSTA, will be locked as positive dMV, i.e. including
proportion, integral items. If high limit occurs to MV calculated, only exlude the positive
integral action.

68
 Function Block Reference

2.3.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-13 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Value Range
Value Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV setting of loop PV
Preference [SVSCL,SVS
Alarm (s) HH PVHH 100.000 (select alarm
CH]
enabled, or it is
disabled).

69
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Value Range
Value Instruction
Name
H alarm value setting
[SVSCL,SVS of loop PV(select
H PVH 90.000
CH] alarm enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value setting
[SVSCL,SVS of loop PV(select
L PVL 10.000
CH] alarm enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
[SVSCL,SVS
LL PVLL 0.000 (select alarm
CH]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PVProcess value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select alarm
[SVSCL,SVS enabled, or it is
H SVH 40.000
CH] disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
SV
affected by selection.
Limits (s)
L value setting of
loop SV (select alarm
[SVSCL,SVS enabled, or it is
L SVL 0.000
CH] disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
[MVSCL,MVS alarm enabled, or it is
H MVH 100.000
CH] disabled).
MV Note: MV limit is not
Limits affected by selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
[MVSCL,MVS alarm enabled, or it is
L MVL 0.000
CH] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
SV(select alarm
EI EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI Selecting the positive
(select － － － deviation alarm is
Set DL ed) enabled.
(s) NEI Selecting the
(select － － － negative deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
MV DMVH Selecting positive
Limits (select － － － velocity alarm is
(%) ed) enabled.

70
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Value Range
Value Instruction
Name
DMVL Selecting negative
(select － － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
DMVLI Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
M limit SV
PID Not less than Loop proportional
PB(%) PB 100.000
0 band parameter SV
PID
Coefficie Not less than Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000
nt 0 parameter SV
Not less than Loop differential time
TD(s) TD 0.000
0 parameter SV

Incompl
Not less than Incomplete integral
ete Diff KD(s) KD 10.000
0 filter coefficient
Coef

Efficien
Selecting deadband
cy
SWDB － － parameter is
(select
enabled.
ed)
Deadzon
e Invalid Selecting deadband
Coefficie (select SWDB √ － parameter is
nt ed) disabled.
DB DB 0.000 － Deadband band size
Deadband band
DBHYS DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
hysteresis
Precise Precision settings
MDB MDB 0.000 [0,1.0]
Controlle range
d Zone Precision settings
Setting MK MK 1.000 －
coefficient
Integral EA EA 0.000 － Range parameter SV
separati
on Coefficient parameter
coefficie DK DK 0.000 －
SV
nt
Efficien
cy Selecting SV ramp is
SWRAMP － －
(select enabled.
Set ed)
Value Invalid
Ramp Selecting SV ramp is
(select SWRAMP √ －
disabled.
ed)
Coefficient parameter
RAMP RAMP 100.000 －
SV
Direct
Selecting direct
(select SWPN － －
action is enabled.
ed)
Direct/R
everse Revers
e Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(select action is enabled.
ed)

71
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Value Range
Value Instruction
Name
Run Selecting
(select STOPP √ － proportional action is
Scale ed) enabled.
Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action is
disabled.
Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
Integral action is enabled.
Action Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
PID Run BYPASS √ － -
Operatio
n Bypass BYPASS － － -
Read-only, can be
IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration or
Input program
Compen
sation Input compensation
IK IK 1.000 －
(%) gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration or
Output program
Compen
sation Output compensation
OK OK 1.000 －
(%) gain
Others
Output compensation
DB DB 0.000 －
bias value
Deviation filter
Set EI KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
coefficient
alarm
filter Deviation filter time
TSV (s) TSV (s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s) (s)
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration or
program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Untrack SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration or
program
2.3.3 Flag
Table 2-14 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)

72
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D22 Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting (DMVH)
D23 Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting (DMVL)
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.3.4 Application Example

Continuous flash tank water level adjustment: to change the flow rate by adjusting the water level
adjusting valve of continuous flash tank, then to control the water level of continuous flash tank. If
the water level tag is WT001, adjusting valve opening feedback is LT001, adjusting valve
command is LT002.

When the control strategy is PIDEP function block, the water level of continuous flash tank is PV,
the set value input of manual instrument is SV, output it to the manual instrument function block,
then output to AO block and adjust the adjusting valve.

73
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-23 Single loop control program

2.4 Extended PID Control Function Block (PIDEX)

Functions of PIDEX are same as PID function block, except the following items.

1. Limit process: In MAN and IMAN mode, output is not limited by MVH and MVL but it must
be in the range of extended range.

2. Mode process

 In track mode, if TVERR=ON, PID is transferred to manual mode.

 In auto mode, if PVERR=ON or OAERR=ON, PID is transferred to manual mode.

 In cascade mode, if PVERR=ON or OAERR=ON, PID is transferred to manual mode. If

PVERR=OFF, OAERR=OFF and SVERR=ON, PID is transferred to auto mode.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

74
 Function Block Reference

2.4.1 Parameters Instruction

Details of various parameters setting refer to the 1.4.

The data type, initial value and default pin of function block parameter in the table below refer to
the function properties setting interface.

When the parameter in the table below is uploaded as TRUE, it means the corresponding
parameter can upload the data of controller and save to the configuration later. When offline
download is performed next time, the saved data can be downloaded.

Table 2-15 Parameter instruction and application of PIDEX Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as
Configuration
Basic MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual
Parameter
Parameters value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
Set in the
function block
SV engineer Configuration
Range SVEU － properties
unit Parameter
Setting settings
s interface.
Set in the
function block
MV engineer Configuration
MVEU － properties
unit Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Limits Value range
MV H limit Operation
MVH TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
value Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
SV H limit Operation
SVH TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
value Parameter
H]

75
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MV output rate
variety limit
value. Used to
Operation
DMVLIM prevent the MV TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
from overlarge
modification in
a short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is
not changed,
Direct/ the MV
Revers increases with OFF=Direct
e the increasing Operation action,
SWPN TRUE
Switch of PV in direct Parameter ON=Reverse
Setting action, and action
s decreases with
the increasing
of PV in
reverse action.
Connect to
BKOUT of
Extended BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
Parameters block
Connect to
Feedback BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
status input downstream
block ERR
Process value Connect to
PV of loop closed － Input Pin measuring
control process point AI
Connect to
outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
control value
MV
Base Connect to
Input measuring
Pin Track input point AI
TV － Input Pin
Setting value Related
s parameter:
SWTR
Upstream
interlock
Track switch: condition
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin input,
ON=track Related
parameter: TV,
TVERR
Connect to
measuring
Output
point AI
compensation,
(feedforward
OA used for － Input Pin
signal),
feedforward
Related
control
parameter:
OK, OB

76
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Advanc PV is in fault or
e Input not, Connect the
PVERR － Input Pin
Pin ON=Abnormal, tag AI.ERR
Setting OFF=normal
s SV is in fault or
Connect the
not,
SVERR － Input Pin upstream
ON=Abnormal,
output
OFF=normal
TV is in fault or
not, Connect the
TVERR － Input Pin
ON=Abnormal, tag AI.ERR
OFF=normal
OA is in fault or
Connect the
not,
OAERR － Input Pin upstream
ON=Abnormal,
output
OFF=normal
PID executor
Connect to
feedback
MF － Input Pin measuring
value , used for
point AI
monitoring
Input
Connect to
compensation
measuring
value, used to
point AI, Refer
improve the
IA － Input Pin to 2.1.1 ,
controllability of
Related
process with
parameters:
long deadband
IK, IB
time
Program
manual and Connect the
auto control upstream
switch, output
PSWAM － Input Pin
OFF=program Enabled when
manual control, MAN_OPT=O
ON=program N
auto control
Program auto/ Connect the
cascade upstream
PSWSV control switch, － Input Pin output
OFF= SV, enabled when
ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automa
tic control
source switch,
Connect the
ON=
upstream
manual-automa
output
tic selection
MAN_OPT － Input Pin Related
controlled by
parameter:
PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM,
manual-automa
SWAM
tic selection
controlled by
SWAM

77
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON= Connect the
auto/cascade upstream
selection output
SV_OPT controlled by － Input Pin Related
PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV,
selection SWSV
controlled by
SWSV
Connect the
MV lock upstream
increase (MV output.
SWINC cannot － Input Pin enabled when
Increase), ON= function block
lock increase is automatic or
cascade
Connect to
Anti-integral measuring
saturation point AI,
RRL input, used for － Input Pin Related
control parameter:
overshoot BKIN Refer to
2.1.4
Connect the
MV lock
upstream
decrease (MV
output.
cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin enabled when
decrease),
function block
ON= Lock
is automatic or
decrease
cascade
MV holds the
current output Connect to
HOLD value, ON= － Input Pin upstream
hold the current output,
output value
Connect to
PID operation electric
MV － Output Pin
output value manual
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
output value Block, Related
Output parameter:
Pin BK_OPT
Connect to the
Feedback BKINERR of
BKOUTERR － Output Pin
status value Upstream
Block
BKOUT value
Related
switch Configuration
BK_OPT － parameter:
(ON=track PV, Parameter
BKOUT
OFF=track SV)
PID Proportion Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Param band size Parameter

78
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Setting Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
s Parameter
When TD=0,
suppress
Derivative time Operation
TD TRUE derivation
(s) Parameter
action, Refer
to 2.1.8
Refer to
Derivative filter Operation Note1, Note2,
KD TRUE 2.1.1
coefficient Parameter Note3, Note4

Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto
return, Configuration
MODE_OPT － Refer to 2.1.1
OFF=manual Parameter
return (default)
Manual and
Enabled when
auto switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=O
OFF=manual, Parameter
FF
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to
equal to preset Related
Operation
SWMMV MV value when TRUE parameter:
Parameter
switch to MMV
Operat manual status
or Preset MV
Comm Operation Enabled when
MMV value (switch to TRUE
and Parameter SWMMV=ON
manual)
Whether to
equal to preset
MV value when
switch to auto
status. PMV
enable switch.
Related
When Operation
SWPMV TRUE parameter:
SWPMV=ON, Parameter
PMV
MV = PMV, MV
velocity alarm,
lock
increase/decre
ase are
disabled
Preset MV
when switching
from
Operation Enabled when
PMV OOS/IMAN/TR/ TRUE
Parameter SWPMV=ON
MAN modes to
AUTO or CAS
mode
Operat SV for loop Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
or Data closed control Parameter

79
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV= MANMV
Manual output Operation
MANMV － in manual
value Parameter
mode
Monitoring
EI Deviation － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
PV HH limit Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV H limit Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV alarm Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
Input DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Alarm
Setting Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
s coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter
Operation
TSV time TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
constant(s)
Related
Valve position
Operation parameter:
NMFLIM negative error TRUE
Parameter NMF Refer to
thresholds
2.1.6
Related
Valve position
Operation parameter:
PMFLIM positive error TRUE
Parameter PMF Refer to
thresholds
2.1.6
Valve position
Operation
TMFHYS error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
Advanc operation,
When cascade
ed when
adjusting,
Calcula BYPASS=ON,
Operation used to excise
tion BYPASS excise PID TRUE
Parameter inner loop
Setting calculation,
when it fails
s switch SV to
Refer to 2.1.4
MV directly for
output
Proportion
suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPP=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action
Integral
suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPI=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action

80
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Enable switch,
when
Operation Related
SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband
enable
Deadband Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
band size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband
Operation
DBHYS band TRUE
Parameter
hysteresis
Non-linear gain
range Operation
GW TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
non-linear gain Parameter
range
Nonlinear gain
Operation
KN coefficient[0,1. TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
0]
Non-linear gain
selection
switch, switch
the relation
between error
and output Related
change value parameters:
to nonlinear. GW, PB and
Used for KN When
Configuration
NGN_OPT control when － NGN_OPT＝
Parameter
proportional ON; GW and
gain needs PB when
nonlinear NGN_OPT＝
change. OFF
OFF=Error
square root
function,
ON=Gap action
function
Integral excise
coefficient.
when EI > EA,
excise
coefficient,
when EI< EA, Operation Related
EA TRUE
excising Parameter parameter: DK
coefficient is
disabled, used
for prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion
modified value Operation Related
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter parameter: EA
excising
Control output
type:
OFF=position Configuration Related
OUT_OPT －
type, Parameter parameter: MV
ON=increment
type

81
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PID type Configuration Refer to 2.2.1
PID_OPT － Note2, Note3, Note4
selection Parameter
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit
Monitoring
PVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit
Monitoring
PVLLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV H limit
Monitoring
MVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV L limit
Monitoring
MVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
SV H limit
Monitoring
SVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Alarm SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive
Monitoring
PEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV positive
Monitoring
DMVHIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV negative
Monitoring
DMVLIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Valve position
error negative Monitoring
NMFIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm Parameter
indication
Valve position
error positive Monitoring
PMFIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm Parameter
indication
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
Compe IB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
nsation bias value parameter: IA
Setting Output Refer to 2.1.4
s Operation
OK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
bias value parameter: OA

82
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set MV
manual slow
increase/decre
ase
MV manual percentage in
slow Operation function block
SMV TRUE
increase/decre Parameter properties
ase value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV
manual fast
increase/decre
ase
MV manual fast percentage in
Operation
FMV increase/decre TRUE function block
Parameter
ase value (%) properties
setting
Fase/Sl
Related
ow/Incr
parameter:
ease/D
MVSCL
ecreas
e Set SV manual
Setting slow
s increase/decre
ase
percentage in
SV slow
Operation function block
SSV increase/decre TRUE
Parameter properties
ase value (%)
setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decre
ase
SV fast percentage in
Operation
FSV increase/decre TRUE function block
Parameter
ase value (%) properties
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Extended
Extend range Configuration
HORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
ed maximum Parameter
Range percentage
Setting Extended
s Configuration
LORLIM range minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage

83
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV ramp
function switch.
When changing
Related
set value,
parameter:
incline it to SV
RAMP. Enable
according to Operation
SWRAMP TRUE when in
the set RAMP Parameter
automatic or
(s). OFF=SV
cascade
ramp function
mode.
off, ON=SV
ramp function
on
SV Related
Advanc Ramp Operation
RAMP TRUE parameter:
e coefficient Parameter
SWRAMP
Setting
Track PV
s
switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If
PV> SVH/ SVL,
SV= range Configuration
SVTR_OPT － Refer to 2.1.3
limit. Used to Parameter
prevent the
output MV from
interference
when changing
the control
mode.
Suppress
Alarm module alarm. Operation
Enable AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
On=prohibit to Parameter
d and display alarm.
Suppre
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
ss
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at
setting switch Operation the first time of
SWOOS TRUE
(ON= OOS Parameter function block
mode) downloading
Related
OOS mode Operation parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
output value Parameter OOS_OPT=O
OOS N
Setting OOS mode
s output value
type. when
OOS_OPT
=ON, Configuration
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=OOSVAL, Parameter
when
OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV
Enable switch
Operation
Check SWPV for checking PV TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
Input validity
Validity PV change limit Operation
PVLMT TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
(%) Parameter

84
 Function Block Reference

2.4.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

85
 Function Block Reference

Table 2-16 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference (%) [SVSCL,SV
HH PVHH 100.000 (select alarm
SCH]
enabled, or it is
disabled).
H alarm value setting
[SVSCL,SV of loop PV(select
H PVH 90.000
SCH] alarm enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value setting
[SVSCL,SV of loop PV(select
L PVL 10.000
SCH] alarm enabled, or it is
disabled)

86
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
[SVSCL,SV
LL PVLL 0.000 (select alarm
SCH]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
Hysteresis PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select alarm
[SVSCL,SV enabled, or it is
H SVH 40.000
SCH] disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
SV Limits affected by selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select alarm
[SVSCL,SV enabled, or it is
L SVL 0.000
SCH] disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
[MVSCL,M alarm enabled, or it is
H MVH 100.000
VSCH] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
MV Limits affected by selection.
(%)
L value setting of
loop MV (select
[MVSCL,M alarm enabled, or it is
L MVL 0.000
VSCH] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
SV(select alarm
Error (EI) EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).
Selecting the positive
PEI
－ － － deviation alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
EI Alarm
(%) Selecting the
NEI
－ － － negative deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.
± (Range
DL DL 100.000 H- Range Deviation alarm SV
L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
Selecting the positive
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － deviation alarm is
enabled.
MF Alarm
Selecting the
(%)
NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
Delay (s) Delay (s) 0.000 － Lag time SV

87
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
Selecting positive
DMVH
－ － － velocity alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
MV Velocity Selecting negative
Limits (%) DMVL
－ － － velocity alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM DMVLIM 100.000 －
limit SV
PID Not less Loop proportional
PB(%) PB 100.000
than 0 parameter SV
PID Not less Loop integral time
Parameter TI(s) TI 20.000
than 0 parameter SV
Not less Loop differential time
TD(s) TD 0.000
than 0 parameter SV
Incomplete
Not less Incomplete integral
Differential KD(s) KD 10.000
than 0 filter coefficient
Coefficient
Selecting deadband
Efficiency
SWDB － － parameter is
(selected)
enabled.
Selecting deadband
Invalid
Deadband SWDB √ － parameter is
(selected)
(%) disabled.
Deadzone
DB 0.000 － Deadband band size
(DB)
Hysteresis Deadband band
DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
(DBHYS) hysteresis
Read-only, non-linear
Gap Action
NGN_OPT － － gain selection switch
(selected)
ON= Gap Action
Read-only, non-linear
Square Root gain selection switch
Non-linear NGN_OPT √ －
(selected) OFF=Square Root
Gain (%) Action
Nonlinear gain action
Range (GW) GW 0.000 [0, 1.0]
range
Coefficient Nonlinear gain
KN 1.000 －
(KN) coefficient
Integral EA EA 0.000 － Range parameter SV
Separation Coefficient parameter
(%) DK DK 0.000 －
SV
Efficiency Selecting SV ramp is
SWRAMP － －
(selected) enabled.
SV Ramp Invalid Selecting SV ramp is
Action (%) SWRAMP √ －
(selected) disabled.
Coefficient Coefficient parameter
RAMP 100.000 －
(RAMP) SV
Direct Selecting direct
SWPN － －
Direct/Reve (selected) action is enabled.
rse Reverse Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(selected) action is enabled.

88
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
Selecting
Run
STOPP √ － proportional action is
(selected)
Scale enabled.
Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action is
disabled.
Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
action is enabled.
Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
Integral is enabled for
BYPASS BYPASS √ －
Action function block
properties interface
when debugging.
The modification of
function block panel
is disabled for
Bypass BYPASS － －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration or
Input program
Compensati Input compensation
on (%) IK IK 1.000 －
gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration or
Output program
Compensati Output compensation
on (%) OK OK 1.000 －
gain
Output compensation
DB DB 0.000 －
bias value
Deviation filter
KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
Set EI coefficient
alarm filter Deviation filter time
TSV (s) TSV (s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s)
Read-only, can be
PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration or
Feedback program
Output
Track Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration or
program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration or
program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Untrack SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration or
program

89
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Value Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value
Parameter Range Instruction
Name
Read-only, can be
Manual and Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration or
Auto program
Control Read-only, can be
Source Program MAN_OPT － － set in configuration or
program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration or
Auto/Casca program
de Control
Source Read-only, can be
Program SV_OPT √ － set in configuration or
program
Read-only, track
TV TV 0.000 －
input value(%)
Executive Feedback MF 0.0 [MVH,MVL] Writable
2.4.3 Flag
Table 2-17 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Cascade (CAS)
D8 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI alarm(NEI)
Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal
D18
(REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22
(DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23
(DMVL)

90
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation
D27
(NMF)
D28 Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)
D20 Tricking Value Error (TVERR)
D21 Output Compensation Value Error (OCVERR)
D29 PV Error
D30 SV Error
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.4.4 Application Example

Example 1

To adjust the water level of LT-1001 in the figure below and realize automatic control for water
level. It is described in the diagram and can be applied.

Figure 2-24 Single loop diagram

The single loop, which consists into a closed-loop feedback control system with a control target, a
detect transmitter and a performer, also can be called as simple control system. It is often applied
for fields with short lag time of the control target, small change of load and interference and
general requirements for control quality.

Its programming is shown below, which can be realized via PIDEX, the interface of host computer
can be invoked by the tag of function block to monitor and control the loop in the diagram.

Figure 2-25 Programming of single loop

The function block instruction and examples are shown in the table below:

91
 Function Block Reference

Table 2-18 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Tag of Function
001 LIC_1001 Tag of PID PID
Block
002 LY_1001 AO (Output) Water Level Adjusting Valve

003 LT_1001 AI (Input) Water Detecting Signal

Parameter settings of PIDEX:

 SVSCL: the same with the unit of PV range

 SVSCH: the same with the unit of PV range

 SVEU: the same with the unit of PV range

 MVSCL: 0~100% in default

 MVSCH: 0~100% in default

 MVEU: 0~100% in default

 SVL: should be the same as the range of SV when SV limit is not required

 SVH: should be the same as the range of SV when SV limit is not required

 MODE_OPT: OFF

 SV_OPT: ON

 Set the alarm enabled and limit of alarm functions of PIDEX according to the
requirements.

 BKIN should connect with the BKOUT of downstream function block, BKINERR should
connect with the BKOUTERR of downstream function block. AO tag can be the
downstream function block for single loop.

Note: the operation parameters SV_OPT, PSWSV (OFF in default) are set to prevent from wrong
operation to “CAS” mode by the operator on the panel.

Notice:

The control panel can invoke the name of function block from HMI directly.

Example 2

To achieve the control for the water level of field craft tank, as shown in the figure below, by setting
the in-tank water level adjustment as the outer loop and the entrance flow adjustment as the inner
loop, and it can be shown and operated in the diagram.

92
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-26 Diagram of cascade loop control

The cascade control is a closed-loop consisted of two PID single loops. The adjusting valve is not
controlled by the major loop (outer loop), but set the output of major loop executed PID calculation
as the SV of minor loop (inner loop), and control the adjusting valve by the output of minor loop
executed PID calculation. It is often used for control targets with large time constant and pure lag,
such as heating furnace temperature+ flow control, temperature+ pressure control, steam drum
water level+ flow control, etc.

Its programming is shown below, which can be achieved by PIDEX. And the data monitoring can
be realized by the control panel of the control module via the host computer display and operation
data.

Figure 2-27 Programming of cascade control

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 2-19 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Tag of Function
001 LIC_4101 Outer Loop PID
Block
Tag of Function
002 FIC_4101 Inner Loop PID
Block
003 FY_4101 AO (Output) Control Target

004 LT_4101 AI (Input) PV of Outer Loop

005 FT_4101 AI (Input) PV of Inner Loop

Parameter settings of PIDEX:

93
 Function Block Reference

 The SVSCL, SVSCH and SVEU of SV range of major/minor loops should be the same as
its input PV range unit.

 The MVSCL, MVSCH and MVEU of output MV range of major loop should be the same
as the input PV range unit of minor loop. And its MVL, MVH should be the same as
MVSCL and MVSCH when the output limit of MV output is not required, or the MV output
will be limited in 0~100.

 The MVSCL, MVSCH and MVEU of output MV range of minor loop use default value
0~100%, and the MVL and MVH use default value 0~100.

 The SVL and SVH of SV range of major/minor loops should be the same as the SV range
when the SV limit function is not required, or the SV range will be limited in 0~100.

 When the SV_OPT of major loop is set as ON, the SV_OPT of minor loop should be set
as OFF, or the cascade operation cannot be performed manually on the panel.

 Set the MODE_OPT of major/minor loops as OFF.

 Set the alarm enabled and limit of alarm functions of PIDEX according to the
requirements.

BKIN of the upstream function block should connect with the BKOUT of downstream function
block, BKINERR should connect with the BKOUTERR of downstream function block. The
downstream function block can be minor loop for cascade major loop, and the AO tag can be the
downstream function block for minor loop.

Notice:

The control panel can invoke the name of function block from HMI directly.

Example 3

To achieve the feedforward control, as shown in the figure below, and it can be operated in the
diagram.

Figure 2-28 Diagram of feedforward control

94
 Function Block Reference

Pure feedforward control is an open-loop control system, and is not often applied because of its
complexity of input or interference in application. In fact, the feedforward-feedback control system
is often used to improve the control performance. It means to reduce lag and improve the control
precision by the feedforward compensation for the major interference and feedback control
correction for other interference.

Its programming is shown below, which can be achieved by PIDEX. And the data monitoring can
be realized by the control panel of the control module via the host computer display and operation
data.

Figure 2-29 Programming of feedforward control

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 2-20 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Tag of Function
001 FIC2301 Loop PID Tag PID
Block
002 FV_2301 AO (Output) Control Target

003 FT_2301 AI (Input) PV

004 FT_2501 AI (Input) Feedforward Signal

Parameter settings of PIDEX:

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: the same as PV range unit

 MVSCL, MVSCH, MVEU: default value 0~100%

 MODE_OPT: OFF

 SV_OPT: ON

 BKIN should connect with the BKOUT of downstream function block, BKINERR should
connect with the BKOUTERR of downstream function block. AO tag can be the
downstream function block for single loop.

 SVL and SVH should be the same as the range of SV when SV limit is not required

 Set OK and OB according to the turning result.

 When input PV error occurs, the PID loop enters into PVERR status. The loop enters into

95
 Function Block Reference

manual status automatically, and PID output MV holds.

 When AO is compelled, PID loop enters into IMAN status. The loop MV tracks the
compel value of AO.

 Set the alarm enabled and limit of alarm functions of PIDEX according to the
requirements.

Notice:

The control panel can invoke the name of function block from HMI directly.

2.5 EPID Control Function Block (EPID)

General PID control functions can be achieved by EPID function block. It has two work modes
OOS and AUTO, and applies to electric power industry.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.5.1 Parameters Instruction

Table 2-21 Parameter instruction and application of EPID Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as PV
actual value H
limit.
Basic Range Configuration When
Parameters Settings SVSCH SV high scale －
Parameter SV>SVSCH, it is
limited by the
maximum of
Range.
The same as PV
actual value L
limit.
Configuration When
SVSCL SV low scale －
Parameter SV<SVSCH, it is
limited by the
minimum of
Range.

96
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as MV
MVSC Configuration
MV high scale － actual value H
H Parameter
limit.
The same as MV
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
Set in the function
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SVDLE SV decimal digits Configuration
－ function block
N [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MVDLE MV decimal digits Configuration
－ function block
N [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,
Parameter
Output MVSCH].
Limits Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,
Parameter
MVSCH].
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
OFF=Direct
Direct/Rev increases with the
Operation action,
erse Switch SWPN increasing of PV in TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
Settings direct action, and
action
decreases with the
increasing of PV in
reverse action.
Extended Input Pin Process value of
Connect to
Parameters PV loop closed control － Input Pin
measuring point AI
process
Connect to outer
loop control value
MV.
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
When select
cascade, SV
comes from CSV.
Connect to
Output
measuring point AI
compensation,
OA － Input Pin (feedforward
used for
signal),
feedforward control
MV=MV0+OA
Input compensation Connect to
value, used to measuring point AI
improve the Refer to 2.1.1
IA － Input Pin
controllability of Related
process with long parameter: IK, IB
deadband time PV=PV+IA

97
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Auto/ cascade
selection:
SWSV TRUE Input Pin -
OFF=auto,
ON=cascade
Connect to electric
manual instrument
Control output
MV=last period
PID operation
Output Pin MV － Output Pin output LT_MV
output value
(before
Limits)+current
period control
increment dMV
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
PID Param When TD=0,
Settings Operation suppress
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Parameter derivation action
Refer to 2.1.8
Note1,
Derivative filter Operation Refer to 2.2.1
KD TRUE Note2, Note3, Note4
coefficient Parameter
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter

Alarm PV LL limit alarm Operation

PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm set Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter

Error Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Indication Parameter

Refer to 2.1.3
SV for loop closed Operation
SV SV TRUE When select SV,
control Parameter
set value comes
from SV.
Extended range
HORLI Configuration
maximum － －
Extended M Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
LORLI Configuration
minimum － －
M Parameter
percentage

98
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Suppress module
Alarm alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled On=prohibit to Parameter
and display alarm
Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter

Set as ON at the
OOS mode setting
OOS SWOO Operation first time of
switch TRUE
Settings S Parameter function block
(ON=OOS mode)
downloading

99
 Function Block Reference

2.5.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-22 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block Application

Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Name Instruction

PV HH alarm value
Preferenc Alarm setting of loop PV
e (%) HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled).

100
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Application

Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Name Instruction
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)

L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)

LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)

PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis

SVH - － - SV H alarm enable

SV
Limits
(%)

SVL - － - SV L alarm enable

H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or
[MVSCL,MVSCH
SVH MVH 100.000 it is disabled).
]
Note: MV limit is
not affected by
MV
selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or
[MVSCL,MVSCH
SVL MVL 0.000 it is disabled).
]
Note: MV limit is
not affected by
selection.

Read-only. EI=PV
EI Alarm －SV(select alarm
(%) EI EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).

Selecting the
PEI
－ － － positive deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.

101
 Function Block Reference

Function Block Application

Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Name Instruction

Selecting the
NEI
－ － － negative deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.

Deviation alarm
DL DL 100.000 DL
SV

Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value

Loop proportional
PB(%) PB 100.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV

PID
Paramet Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
er parameter SV

Loop differential
TD(s) TD 0.000 Not less than 0
time parameter SV

Differenti
Others Incomplete
al Filter
KD(S) KD 10.000 Not less than 0 integral filter
Coefficie
coefficient
nt

Direct Selecting direct

SWPN － －
Control (selected) action is enabled.
Direction Reverse Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(selected) action is enabled.

Input
Read-only, can be
Compen
IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
sation
or program
(%)

Output
Read-only, can be
Compen
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
sation
or program
(%)

2.5.3 Application Example

Refer to 2.3.3.

102
 Function Block Reference

2.6 LEPID Function Block (LEPID)

The input of LEPID is bias. The function block provides three modes which are OOS, TR and
AUTO. It connects with electric power manual instrument but not AO, and is special for electric
power project.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 100μs.

Please refer to the Section 1 Overview and 2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block before
using the function block.

2.6.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-23 Parameter instruction and application of LEPID function block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range － The same as

Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale MV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
The same as
Configuration
EISCH EI high value － the actual
Parameter
value of EI H.
The same as
Configuration
EISCL EI low value － the actual
Parameter
value of EI L.
Set in the
function block
EI actual value Configuration
EIEU － properties
unit Parameter
settings
interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
EI decimal digits Configuration function block
EIDLEN －
[0,5] Parameter panel (equal
to 3 as
default).

103
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuration function block
MVDLEN －
[0,5] Parameter panel (equal
to 3 as
default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Output Parameter
CH]
Limits
MVoutput rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent
Operation
DMVLIM the MV from TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Extended Input Pin EI Bias input － Input Pin Refer to 2.1.4
Parameters
Connect to
measuring
Track input value
point AI
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin
Related
MV=TV )
parameter:
SWTR
Upstream
interlock
Track switch: condition
SWTR OFF= not － Input Pin input,
track ,ON= track Related
parameter:
TV
Connect to
measuring
point AI
(feedforward
signal),
Related
Output parameter:
compensation, OK, OB
OA used for － Input Pin Compensate
feedforward for PID
control calculated
result, MV=
MV of last
period + PID
output
variable+OA
increment

104
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
measuring
point AI,
Input Refer to 2.1.2
compensation Related
value, used to parameter:
IA improve the － Input Pin IK, perform
controllability of input
process with long compensation
deadband time from I to EI,
after
compensation
, EIR=EI+IA.
Upstream
output,
enabled when
function block
MV lock increase is automatic
(MV cannot or cascade
SWINC － Input Pin
Increase), ON= when lock
lock increase increase
conflicts with
MV Limits,
MV Limits has
the priority.
Connect the
upstream
MV lock decrease
output.
(MV cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin enabled when
decrease), ON=
function block
Lock decrease
is automatic
or cascade
Connect to
electric
manual
instrument In
Output PID operation
－ Output Pin track and
pin output value
auto modes, it
Output Pin must be in the
range of MVH
and MVL
MV H limit alarm
MVHIND － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
indication
MV L limit alarm
MVLIND － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
indication
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
TD =0,
PID Param Operation Suppress
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Settings Parameter deviation
Action
Refer to
general PID
Derivative filter Operation
KD TRUE function block
coefficient Parameter Note1, Note2, Note3,
Note4

105
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Integral excise
coefficient. when
EI > EA, excise
coefficient, when
Related
EI< EA, excising Operation
EA TRUE parameter:
coefficient is Parameter
DK
disabled, used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion Related
modified value Operation parameter:
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter EA
Note2
excising Refer to
Precise controlled Operation Note1
MDB TRUE Refer to
Advanced zone range Parameter
Param Precise controlled Operation
MK TRUE Refer to Note1
Setting zone coefficient Parameter
Input EI Operation
EDB TRUE Refer to Note3
Deadband Parameter
Refer to Note3,
Output EI Operation can be
MVDB TRUE
Deadband Parameter modified in
supervision
Integral suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPI=ON, stop Parameter
integral action
Proportion
suppress switch,
Operation
STOPP when TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
STOPP=ON, stop
integral action
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm D limit indication Parameter
DMVLIN MV negative rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage
Suppress module
alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm On=prohibit to Parameter
Enable and display alarm
Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode setting the first time
OOS Operation
SWOOS switch (ON= OOS TRUE of function
Settings Parameter
mode) block
downloading

106
 Function Block Reference

Note 1: Precise control processing

When Mdb>0 and the absolute value of bias after compensation is within precise control zone
(-MDB, MDB), ratio coefficient KP will be corrected as KP=KP*MK.

Note 2: Integral isolation processing

Integral will not work if the absolute value of bias after compensation is greater than
integral-separated coefficient. Ratio coefficient KP will be corrected according to set ratio
correction, which will be KP=KP+DK.

Note 3:

 Input deadband

When fabs (EI) < EDB, dMV (the variation of MV)=0, stop the change of MV. When EI>DB, output
the PID operation result.

 Output deadband

Only when cumulative variation of dMV is over output deadband, will MV changes. Otherwise it will
maintain. For example, if deadband is set “1”, only when the cumulative variation of dMV is over
“1” (eg: change from 30 to 31), will MV changes.

107
 Function Block Reference

2.6.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-24 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Panel
Initial
Name Paramete Value Range Application Instruction
Value
r Name
H value setting of loop
MV (select alarm
MV Limit 100.00 [MVSCL,MVSC enabled, or it is
Preference H MVH
Settings 0 H] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.

108
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Initial
Name Paramete Value Range Application Instruction
Value
r Name
L value setting of loop
MV (select alarm
[MVSCL,MVSC enabled, or it is
L MVL 0.000
H] disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.
Positive Selecting positive
Rate － － － velocity alarm is
(selected) enabled.
MV Speed Limit Negative Selecting negative
Settings Rate － － － velocity alarm is
(selected) enabled.
100.00 Loop MV velocity limit
Limit DMVLIM －
0 SV
100.00 Loop proportional
PB(%) PB Not less than 0
0 parameter SV
PID
Parameterizati Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
on parameter SV
Loop differential time
TD(s) TD 0.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
Derivation Differential filter
KD(s) KD(s) 10.000 －
Filter Coef coefficient (s)
Read-only, track input
Track Value TV TV 0.000 －
value(%)
When the absolute
value of EI is less than
error dead zone band
EDB, dMV (MV
Others Input Error variable)= 0, stop the
EDB EDB 0.000 －
Deadzone operation MV
modification. When EI
is larger than DB,
output based on
calculation result.
Integral EA EA 0.000 － Range parameter SV
Isolation Coefficient parameter
Coefficient DK DK 0.000 －
SV
Run Selecting proportional
STOPP √ －
Proportional (selected) action is enabled.
Action Selecting proportional
Stop STOPP － －
action is disabled.
Read-only, can be set
Input
Value (IA) IA 0.000 － in configuration or
Compensation
program

can be modified in
Output Error
MVDB MVDB 0.000 － supervision
Deadzone
Refer to 2.1.6

can be modified in
Precise MDB MDB －
supervision
Controlled
Zone Settings can be modified in
MK MK －
supervision

Integral Action Selecting integral

Run STOPI √ －
action is enabled.

109
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Initial
Name Paramete Value Range Application Instruction
Value
r Name
Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
Output Read-only, can be set
Compensation Value (OA) OA 0.000 － in configuration or
(%) program
2.6.3 Flag
Table 2-25 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D3 Tricking (TR)
D4 Automatic (AUTO)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
Alarm for Range High/Low Limit
D18
Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity
D22
Amplitude Limiting (DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity
D23
Amplitude Limiting (DMVL)
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.6.4 Application Example

Refer to 2.3.3.

2.7 PID for Pulse Output Function Block (PID_TP)

The functions are the same with those of PID function block except the followings ones:

 Track is not available.

 There is no need to connect BKIN.

For there is no BKIN, it is like BKIN=MV of PID function block in the program, means PID_TP can
only be the most downstream block of the control but not the upstream block. Connect the DOOUT
with DO at last to control duty ratio of output.

 A more output BOOL whose duty ratio be calculated by current MV and pulse period.

This function block can be used in the condition in which temperature object is controlled by duty
ratio.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

110
 Function Block Reference

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.7.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-26 Parameter instruction and application of PID_TP Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic The same as
Configuration
Parameters MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
Range Parameter
settings
Settings interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
[0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
[0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Limits Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
SVH SV H limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]

111
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MV output rate
variety limits
value. Used to
Operation
DMVLIM prevent the MV TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
from overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with the OFF=Direct
Direct/Rever
increasing of PV Operation action,
se Switch SWPN TRUE
in direct action, Parameter ON=Reverse
Settings
and decreases action
with the
increasing of PV
in reverse action.
Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Parameters BKINERR Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
block ERR
Process value of Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin measuring
control process point AI
Connect to
Base Input outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
Pin Settings control value
MV
Connect to
measuring
Output
point AI
compensation,
(feedforward
OA used for － Input Pin
signal),
feedforward
Related
control
parameter:
OK, OB
Advance PID executor
Connect to
Input Pin feedback value ,
MF － Input Pin measuring
Settings used for
point AI
monitoring
Input Connect to
compensation measuring
value, used to point AI, Refer
IA improve the － Input Pin to 2.1.2
controllability of Related
process with long parameter: IK,
deadband time IB
Program manual
Connect the
and auto control
upstream
switch,
output
PSWAM OFF=program － Input Pin
Enabled when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=O
ON=program auto
N
control

112
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect the
Program auto/
upstream
cascade control
PSWSV － Input Pin output
switch, OFF= SV,
enabled when
ON=CSV
SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automatic
control source
switch, ON= Connect the
manual-automatic upstream
selection output
MAN_OP
controlled by － Input Pin Related
T
PSWAM, OFF= parameter:
manual-automatic PSWAM,
selection SWAM
controlled by
SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON= Connect the
auto/cascade upstream
selection output
SV_OPT controlled by － Input Pin Related
PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV,
selection SWSV
controlled by
SWSV
Connect the
upstream
MV lock increase
output.
(MV cannot
SWINC － Input Pin Enabled when
Increase), ON=
the function
lock increase
block is auto
or cascade.
Connect to
measuring
point AI,
Anti-integral
Refer to 2.1.4
saturation input,
RRL － Input Pin Related
used for control
parameter:
overshoot
BKIN;
Integral Limits
Action
Connect the
upstream
MV lock decrease
output.
(MV cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin enabled when
decrease), ON=
function block
Lock decrease
is automatic or
cascade
MV holds the
current output Connect to
HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin upstream
the current output output,
value
BOOL,
Output Pin DOOUT Pulse output － Output Pin Connect the
tag DO

113
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to AO
PID operation
MV － Output Pin tag
output value Note1
Refer to
Connect to the
BKIN of
Upstream
Feedback output
BKOUT － Output Pin Block,
value
Related
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback status BKINERR of
－ Output Pin
RR value Upstream
Block
BKOUT value
Related
switch (ON=track Configuration
BK_OPT － parameter:
PV, OFF=track Parameter
BKOUT
SV)
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
When TD=0,
suppress
Operation
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE derivation
PID Param Parameter
action Refer to
Settings 2.1.8
Refer to
general PID
Derivative filter Operation
KD TRUE function block
coefficient Parameter Note1, Note2, Note3,
Note4

Operation Note1
TP Pulse Circle (s) TRUE Refer to
Parameter
Operator Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Command Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_O Configuration
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.1.1
PT Parameter
return
Manual and auto
Enabled when
switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=O
OFF=manual, Parameter
FF
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to equal
Related
to preset MV Operation
SWMMV TRUE parameter:
value when switch Parameter
MMV
to manual status
Preset MV value Operation Enabled when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON

114
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Whether to equal
Related
to present MV Operation
SWPMV TRUE parameter:
value when switch Parameter
PMV
to auto status
Operation Enabled when
PMV Preset MV TRUE
Parameter SWPMV=ON
SV for loop closed Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
control Parameter
Operator Output value=
Manual output Operation
Data MANMV － MANMV in
value Parameter
manual mode
Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Input Alarm Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Settings hystersis value Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant(s) Parameter
Valve position
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
TMFHYS error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
When cascade
operation, when
Advance adjusting,
BYPASS=ON,
Calculation Operation used to excise
BYPASS excise PID TRUE
Settings Parameter inner loop
calculation, switch
when it fails
SV to MV directly
Refer to 2.1.4
for output
Proportion
suppress switch,
Operation
STOPP when TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
STOPP=ON, stop
integral action

115
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Integral suppress
switch, when
Operation
STOPI STOPI=ON, TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
stop integral
action
Enable switch,
Operation Related
SWDB when SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband enable
Deadband band Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE －
hysteresis Parameter
Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range
Nonlinear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient[0,1.0] Parameter
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the relation Related
between error and parameters:
output change GW, PB and
value to nonlinear. KN When
NGN_OP Used for control Configuration
－ NGN_OPT＝
T when proportional Parameter
ON; GW and
gain needs
PB when
nonlinear change.
NGN_OPT＝
OFF=Error square
root function, OFF
ON=Gap action
function
Integral excise
coefficient. when
EI > EA, excise
coefficient, when
EI< EA, excising Operation Related
EA TRUE
coefficient is Parameter parameter: DK
disabled, used for
prevent MV
change from
overlarge
Proportion
modified value Operation Related
DK TRUE
when integral Parameter parameter: EA
excising
PID control
algorithm
selection switch.
PID_OPT ＝0,
perform standard
OUT_OP PID algorithm. Configuration Related
－
T PID_OPT＝1, Parameter parameter: MV
perform PV D_PI
algorithm.
PID_OPT＝2,
perform PV PD_I
algorithm

116
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PID type
Refer to
selection: Configuration Note1, Note2,
PID_OPT － 2.1.1
0=PID,1=D_PI,2= Parameter Note3, Note4
PD_I
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Alarm SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position
Monitoring
NMFIND error negative － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Valve position
Monitoring
PMFIND error positive － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
Compensati bias value parameter: IA
on Settings Output Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
OK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
OB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
bias value parameter: OA

117
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set MV
manual slow
increase/decre
ase
percentage in
MV manual slow
Operation function block
SMV increase/decreas TRUE
Parameter properties
e value (%)
setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV
manual fast
increase/decre
ase
MV manual fast percentage in
Operation
FMV increase/decreas TRUE function block
Parameter
e value (%) properties
setting
Related
Fase/Slow/In parameter:
crease/Decr MVSCL
ease Set SV manual
Settings slow
increase/decre
ase
percentage in
SV slow
Operation function block
SSV increase/decreas TRUE
Parameter properties
e value (%)
setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decre
ase
SV fast percentage in
Operation
FSV increase/decreas TRUE function block
Parameter
e value (%) properties
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage

118
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV ramp function
switch. When
Related
changing set
parameter:
value, incline it to
RAMP.
SV according to Operation
SWRAMP TRUE Enable when
the set RAMP (s). Parameter
in automatic or
OFF=SV ramp
cascade
function off,
mode.
ON=SV ramp
function on
Related
SV Advance Operation
RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE parameter:
Settings Parameter
SWRAMP
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_O Configuration
range limit. Used － Refer to 2.1.3
PT Parameter
to prevent the
output MV from
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Suppress module
alarm,, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm On=prohibit to Parameter
Enabled and display alarm
Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode
Operation the first time of
SWOOS setting switch TRUE
Parameter function block
(ON= OOS mode)
downloading
Related
OOS mode output Operation parameter:
OOSVAL TRUE
OOS value Parameter OOS_OPT=O
Settings N
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON,
OOS_OP Configuration
MV=OOSVAL, － Refer to 1.1.1
T Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV

Note. Duty ratio output

119
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-30 Duty Ratio Output Sketch Figure

Duty ratio is calculated from the percentage of current MV according to pulse period TP. For
example, if MV=65, MVSCH=100, MVSCL=0, then MV%=65%. The ON time of DOOUT is
65%*TP, while OFF time is (1-65%)*TP.

120
 Function Block Reference

2.7.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-27 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV setting of loop PV
Preference Alarm HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
(%) enabled, or it is
disabled).

121
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
Hystere PV Process value
PVHYS 0.000 －
sis alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
EI Alarm Deviati SV(select alarm
(%) EI 0.000 －
on (EI) enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI Selecting the
(select － － － positive deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.
NEI Selecting the
(select － － － negative deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.

122
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
Selecting the
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － positive deviation
alarm is enabled.
MF
Alarm Selecting the
(%) NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
Delay
Delay (s) 0.000 － Lag time SV
(s)
DMVH Selecting positive
(select － － － velocity alarm is
MV ed) enabled.
Velocity DMVL Selecting negative
Limits (select － － － velocity alarm is
(%) ed) enabled.
DMVLI Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
M limit SV
Loop proportional
PID PB(%) PB 100.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
PID
Coefficie Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
nt parameter SV
Loop differential
TD(s) TD 0.000 Not less than 0
time parameter SV
Incompl
ete
Differenti Incomplete integral
KD(s) KD(s) 10.000 Not less than 0
al filter coefficient
coefficie
nt
Efficien
Selecting deadband
cy
SWDB － － parameter is
(select
enabled.
ed)
Invalid Selecting deadband
Deadba (select SWDB √ － parameter is
nd (%) ed) disabled.
Deadband band
DB DB 0.000 －
size
Deadband band
DBHYS DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
hysteresis
Non-line Gap Read-only,
ar Gain Action non-linear gain
NGN_OPT － －
(%) (select selection switch
ed) ON= Gap Action
Read-only,
Error
non-linear gain
Square
NGN_OPT √ － selection switch
(select
OFF=Square Root
ed)
Action
Range Nonlinear gain
GW 0.000 [0,1.0]
(GW) action range

123
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Nonlinear gain
KN KN 1.000 －
coefficient
Range parameter
Integral EA EA 0.000 －
SV
Separati
on (%) Coeffici Coefficient
Coefficient 0.000 －
ent parameter SV
Efficien
cy Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP － －
(select is enabled.
SV ed)
Ramp
Action Invalid
Selecting SV ramp
(%) (select SWRAMP √ －
is disabled.
ed)
Coefficient
RAMP RAMP 100.000 －
parameter SV
Direct
Selecting direct
(select SWPN － －
action is enabled.
ed)
Direct/R
everse Revers
e Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(select action is enabled.
ed)
Run Selecting
(select STOPP √ － proportional action
Scale ed) is enabled.
Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action
is disabled.
Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
Integral action is enabled.
Action Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block
properties interface
PID when debugging.
Operatio
n The modification of
function block panel
is disabled for
Bypass BYPASS － －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
Input or program
Compen
sation Input compensation
IK IK 1.000 －
(%) gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Output Read-only, can be
Compen OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
sation or program

124
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
(%) Output
OK OK 1.000 －
compensation gain
Output
DB DB 0.000 － compensation bias
value
Deviation filter
Set EI KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
coefficient
Alarm
Filter Deviation filter time
TSV (s) TSV (s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s)
Read-only, can be
Proces
BK_OPT － － set in configuration
Feedbac s Value
or program
k Output
Track Read-only, can be
Set
BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
Value
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
Set or program
Value
Track Read-only, can be
Untrack SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
Man or program
Auto
Cntrl Src Read-only, can be
Progra
MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
Cascade or program
Cntrl Src Read-only, can be
Progra
SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
m
or program
Output Output
TP 10.000 － Read-only
(s) (s)
2.7.3 Flag
Table 2-28 Flag List

Flag Instruction
D0 Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Manual (MAN)
D4 Cascade(AUTO)
D8 PV HH Limit Alarm (PVHH)
D9 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D10 PV LL Limit Alarm (PVLL)
D11 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)

125
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D15 MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 NEI Alarm (NEI)
Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal
D18
(REVSCL)
D19 Alarm for Configuration Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude
D22
Limiting (DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude
D23
Limiting (DMVL)
D27 Alarm for Valve Position NEI (NMF)
D28 Alarm for Valve Position PEI (PMF)

2.8 Pulse PI Control Function Block (PI_PLS)

Pulse PI control function block adopts the "Control-Maintain-Control" mode, which is mainly used
to fields with long deadband or control fields according to sampling data of analyzer unit.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 120μs.

Please refer to the Section 1 Overview and 2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block before
using the function block.

2.8.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-29 Parameter instruction and application of PID_PLS Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as

Configuratio
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual value
n Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuratio
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual value
n Parameter
L limit.
The same as
Configuratio
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual value
n Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuratio
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual value
n Parameter
L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
n Parameter
settings
interface.

126
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
n Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuratio
SVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuratio
MVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
SVH SV H limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
Limits H]
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MV output rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent the Operation
DMVLIM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
MV from overlarge Parameter
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
Direct/Re OFF=Direct
increases with the
verse Operation action,
SWPN increasing of PV in TRUE
Switch Parameter ON=Reverse
direct action, and
Settings action
decreases with the
increasing of PV in
reverse action.

Base Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Input Pin BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
Parameters downstream
Settings
block
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
Process value of Connect to
PV loop closed control － Input Pin measuring point
process AI
Connect to
outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
control value
MV

127
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
measuring point
Track input value
AI
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin
Related
MV=TV )
parameter:
SWTR
Upstream
Track switch: interlock
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin condition input,
ON=track Related
parameter: TV
Connect to
measuring point
Output
AI (feedforward
compensation,
OA － Input Pin signal),
used for
Related
feedforward control
parameter: OK,
OB
Connect the
upstream
output.
Note: when up
jumping occurs
Redundancy is
to CSW, if it is in
Advance required in the case
external startup
Input Pin of control period TP
CSW － Input Pin mode, control
Settings used to control
and count the
sampling PI and TP
TC time, after
is less than 0.
TC time, set
CSW as OFF,
and the output
will be
maintained.
PID executor Connect to
MF feedback value , － Input Pin measuring point
used for monitoring AI
Connect to
Input compensation
measuring point
value, used to
AI, Refer to
improve the
IA － Input Pin 2.1.2
controllability of
Related
process with long
parameter: IK,
deadband time
IB
Program manual
and auto control
Connect the
switch,
upstream output
PSWAM OFF=program － Input Pin
Enabled when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=ON
ON=program auto
control
Program auto/ Connect the
cascade control upstream output
PSWSV － Input Pin
switch, OFF= SV, enabled when
ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON

128
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Manual-automatic
control source
Connect the
switch, ON=
upstream output
manual-automatic
Related
MAN_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin
parameter:
by PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM,
manual-automatic
SWAM
selection controlled
by SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON= Connect the
auto/cascade upstream output
SV_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin Related
by PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV, SWSV
selection controlled
by SWSV
Connect the
upstream
MV lock increase
output. enabled
(MV cannot
SWINC － Input Pin when function
Increase), ON=
block is
lock increase
automatic or
cascade
Connect to
measuring point
Anti-integral AI, Related
saturation input, parameter:
RRL － Input Pin
used for control BKIN;
overshoot Refer to 2.1.4
Integral Limits
Action
Connect the
upstream
MV lock decrease
output. enabled
(MV cannot
SWDEC － Input Pin when function
decrease), ON=
block is
Lock decrease
automatic or
cascade
MV holds the
current output Connect to
HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin upstream
the current output output,
value

Output Connect to
PID operation
Pin MV － Output Pin electric manual
output value
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Block, Related
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTER Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
R value
Upstream Block

129
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
BKOUT value Related
Configuratio
BK_OPT switch (ON=track － parameter:
n Parameter
PV, OFF=track SV) BKOUT
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
size Parameter
Operation
PID TI Integral time (s) TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Parameter
Param
Settings Operation Note1
TC Control Time(s) TRUE Refer to
Parameter
Operation Note1
TP Control Cycle(s) TRUE Refer to
Parameter
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_OP Configuratio
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.1.1
T n Parameter
return (default)
Manual and auto
Enabled when
switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=OF
OFF=manual, Parameter
F
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to equal to
Related
preset MV value Operation
SWMMV TRUE parameter:
when switch to Parameter
MMV
manual status
Operator
Command Preset MV value Operation Enabled when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON
When up-jump
Operation
CSWI CSWI control input TRUE occurs to CSWI,
Parameter
CSW=ON.
Whether to equal to
preset MV value
when switch to auto
status. PMV
enable switch. Related
Operation
SWPMV When TRUE parameter:
Parameter
SWPMV=ON, MV PMV
= PMV, MV velocity
alarm, lock
increase/decrease
are disabled
Preset MV when
switching from
Operation Enabled when
PMV OOS/IMAN/TR/MA TRUE
Parameter SWPMV=ON
N modes to AUTO
or CAS mode
Operator Operation
SV SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
Data Parameter
Output value=
Manual output Operation
MANMV － MANMV in
value Parameter
manual mode

130
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm set Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
value Parameter
Input Deviation alarm Operation
Alarm DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Settings
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter
Deviation filter time Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
constant(s) Parameter
Valve position
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position error
Operation
TMFHYS alarm hysteresis TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
time
Bypass PID
When cascade
operation, when
adjusting, used
BYPASS=ON,
Operation to excise inner
Advance BYPASS excise PID TRUE
Parameter loop when it
Calculatio calculation, switch
fails Refer to
n Settings SV to MV directly
2.1.4
for output
Proportion
suppress switch, Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
when STOPP=ON, Parameter
stop integral action
Integral suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPI=ON, stop Parameter
integral action
Enable switch,
Operation Related
SWDB when SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband enable
Deadband band Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range

131
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Nonlinear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient[0,1.0] Parameter
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the relation Related
between error and parameters:
output change GW, PB and KN
value to nonlinear. When
Used for control Configuratio
NGN_OPT － NGN_OPT＝
when proportional n Parameter
ON; GW and
gain needs
PB when
nonlinear change.
NGN_OPT＝
OFF=Error square
root function, OFF
ON=Gap action
function
Output type
selection switch.
When OUT_OPT＝ Configuratio Related
OUT_OPT －
OFF, output n Parameter parameter: MV
position type MV;
OUT_OPT
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Alarm SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative deviation Monitoring
NEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
MV positive rate Monitoring
DMVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position error
Monitoring
NMFIND negative alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Valve position error
Monitoring
PMFIND positive alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Compens Refer to 2.1.2
Input compensation Operation
ation IK TRUE Related
gain Parameter
Settings parameter: IA

132
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Refer to 2.1.2
Input compensation Operation
IB TRUE Related
bias value Parameter
parameter: IA
Refer to 2.1.4
Output Operation
OK TRUE Related
compensation gain Parameter
parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation bias TRUE Related
Parameter
value parameter: OA
Set MV manual
slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual slow in function block
Operation
SMV increase/decrease TRUE properties
Parameter
value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual fast
Operation in function block
FMV increase/decrease TRUE
Parameter properties
value (%)
setting
Related
Fase/Slo parameter:
w/Increas MVSCL
e/Decreas Set SV manual
e Settings slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
SV slow in function block
Operation
SSV increase/decrease TRUE properties
Parameter
value (%) setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
SV fast
Operation in function block
FSV increase/decrease TRUE
Parameter properties
value (%)
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Extended range
Configuratio
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended n Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuratio
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
n Parameter
percentage

133
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
SV ramp function
switch. When
changing set value, Related
incline it to SV parameter:
according to the set Operation RAMP. Enable
SWRAMP TRUE
RAMP (s). Parameter when in
OFF=SV ramp automatic or
function off, cascade mode.
ON=SV ramp
function on
SV Related
Operation
Advance RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE parameter:
Parameter
Settings SWRAMP
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_OP Configuratio
range limit. Used to － Refer to 2.1.3
T n Parameter
prevent the output
MV from
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Suppress module
Operation
Alarm AOF alarm, On=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
Enabled to display alarm.
and Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Suppress Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode setting
Operation the first time of
SWOOS switch (ON= OOS TRUE
Parameter function block
mode)
downloading
Related
OOS mode output Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
OOS value Parameter
OOS_OPT=ON
Settings
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON,
Configuratio
OOS_OPT MV=OOSVAL, － Refer to 1.1.1
n Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain the
MV

Note1: Other instruction refers to 2.2 except followings:

134
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-31 Algorithm of pulse PI control function block

PI calculation with hold function is control algorithm of pulse PI controller function block, by which
PI control calculation is implemented to get output value MV and output change value dMV. In the
mode of auto run (AUT, CAS), PI control with hold function will be implemented only in the control
time TC of each pulse time TP. Output value will be maintained in the left time (TP-TC).

Control time and sampling period (TS) must be set according to principles as follows:

Pulse period: TP=Deadband time of control objects +lag time constant * (from 2 to 3) of control
objects

Control time: TC=TP/10

The unit of time is second.

Pulse period value is the time of process variable PV reaching stable after the output value acting
on the whole process. The shortest period of the main bump which influences the process is Tn. If
Tn is shorter than sampling period, it is not available. Sampling period longer than Tn can be tuned
according to the following expression:

TP<=Tn/5

Sampling action:

Figure 2-32 Principle figure of Pulse PI control

Pulse PI control calculation expression (P_I control)

T
MV  K P * K S * (PVn  En )
TI

EI n  PVn  SVn

135
 Function Block Reference

100
KP 
PB

MVSCH  MVSCL
KS 
SVSCH  SVSCL

KP is proportional coefficient and KS is range transition coefficient.

When TP is set 0, pulse PI control can be started from outside. PI control started from outside is
achieved when the control switch (CSW) is set ON by other function blocks. Once PI control is
started, PI control will run in the control time (TC). The control switch will be set OFF after TC. If
the control switch is set OFF forcedly by outside function blocks, output values must be maintained,
shown as follows.

Figure 2-33 Principle figure of pulse PI control started from outside

136
 Function Block Reference

2.8.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-30 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference (%) HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled).

137
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
EI Alarm SV(select alarm
(%) EI EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI Selecting the
(select － － － positive deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.
NEI Selecting the
(select － － － negative deviation
ed) alarm is enabled.

138
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
Selecting the
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － positive deviation
alarm is enabled.
MF Alarm Selecting the
(%) NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
TMFHY
TMFHYS 0.000 － Lag time SV
S
DMVH Selecting positive
(select － － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
MV Velocity
Limits (%) DMVL Selecting negative
(select － － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
DMVLI Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
M limit SV
PID Loop proportional
PB(%) PB 100.000 Not less than 0
PID parameter SV
Parameter Loop integral time
TI (s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
Sampling TC (s) TC 1.000 Not less than 0 Control time
Time TP (s) TP 1.000 Not less than 0 Control period
Enable Selecting deadband
(select SWDB － － parameter is
ed) enabled.
Disable Selecting deadband
Deadband (select SWDB √ － parameter is
(%) ed) disabled.
Deadband band
DB DB 0.000 －
size
Deadband band
DBHYS DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
hysteresis
Gap Read-only,
Action non-linear gain
NGN_OPT － －
(select selection switch
ed) ON= Gap Action
Read-only,
Square
non-linear gain
Non-linear Root
NGN_OPT √ － selection switch
Gain (%) (select
OFF=Square Root
ed)
Action
Nonlinear gain
GW GW 0.000 [0,1.0]
action range
Nonlinear gain
KN KN 1.000 －
coefficient
SV Ramp Enable
Selecting SV ramp
Action (%) (select SWRAMP － －
is enabled.
ed)

139
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Disable
Selecting SV ramp
(select SWRAMP √ －
is disabled.
ed)
Coefficient
RAMP RAMP 100.000 －
parameter SV
Direct
Selecting direct
(select SWPN － －
action is enabled.
ed)
Control
Direction Revers
e Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(select action is enabled.
ed)
Run Selecting
(select STOPP √ － proportional action
ed) is enabled.
Proportiona
l Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action
is disabled.

Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
Integral action is enabled.
Action Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
PID
The modification of
function block panel
is disabled for
Bypass BYPASS － －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
Input or program
Compensat Input compensation
ion (%) IK IK 1.000 －
gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
or program
Output
Compensat Output
OK OK 1.000 －
ion (%) compensation gain
Output
DB DB 0.000 － compensation bias
value
Deviation filter
Bias Alarm KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
coefficient
Filter
Settings Deviation filter time
TSV (s) TSV (s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s)

140
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only, can be
PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration
Feedback or program
Output
Track Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Not
SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
Track
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
MAN_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Progra
MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
SV_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Progra
SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, track
TV (%) TV (%) TV (%) 0.000 －
input value(%)
2.8.3 Flag
Table 2-31 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tricking (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 Disable PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 Disable NEI alarm(NEI)
D18 Disable Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22 Disable
(DMVH)

141
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23 Disable
(DMVL)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D27 Disable Alarm for Valve Position Negative Deviation (NMF)
D28 Disable Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)

2.9 Integral of Manual Set PD Function Block (PD_SI)

PD function block with manual resetting implements PD control and integral action is control
function set manually. In the process of programmable temperature control, operation conditions
are not maintained.

For example, there is powerful instant heat liberation in the chemistry process. In this case,
integral action will be weakened for a period of time. Just like these processes (deadband time is
too long or process time constant is too big), big proportion band should be set. If integral action
works, oscillation will be caused.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 120μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.9.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-32 Parameter instruction and application of PID_SI Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as

Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual
Parameter
value H limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual
Parameter
value L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.

142
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set in the
function block
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
[0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
[0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVS
Parameter
CH]
Value range
Operation
SVH SV H limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
Limits
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MVoutput rate
variety limits value.
Used to prevent the Operation
DMVLIM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
MV from overlarge Parameter
modification in a
short time.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
Direct/R OFF=Direct
increases with the
everse Operation action,
SWPN increasing of PV in TRUE
Switch Parameter ON=Reverse
direct action, and
Settings action
decreases with the
increasing of PV in
reverse action.
Feedback input.
BKIN does not act in
Base Connect to
Extended the calculation. It
Input Pin BKOUT of
Parameters BKIN outputs and tracks － Input Pin
Settings downstream
the modification of
block
BKIN only in IMAN
mode.
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
Connect to
Note1
PV PV, Refer to － Input Pin measuring
point AI

143
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
control value
MV
Connect to
measuring
point AI.
TV Track input value － Input Pin
Related
parameter:
SWTR.
Upstream
interlock
Track switch:
condition
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin
input,
ON=track
Related
parameter: TV
Connect to
measuring
Output point AI
compensation, used (feedforward
OA － Input Pin
for feedforward signal),
control Related
parameter:
OK, OB
PID executor Connect to
Advance MF feedback value , － Input Pin measuring
Input Pin used for monitoring point AI
Settings Connect to
Input compensation
measuring
value, used to
point AI,
improve the
IA － Input Pin Refer to 2.1.2
controllability of
Related
process with long
parameter: IK,
deadband time
IB
Program manual and Connect the
auto control switch, upstream
OFF=program output
PSWAM － Input Pin
manual control, Enabled when
ON=program auto MAN_OPT=O
control N
Connect the
Program auto/
upstream
cascade control
PSWSV － Input Pin output
switch, OFF= SV,
enabled when
ON=CSV
SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automatic
control source Connect the
switch, ON= upstream
manual-automatic output
MAN_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin Related
by PSWAM, OFF= parameter:
manual-automatic PSWAM,
selection controlled SWAM
by SWAM

144
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Auto/Cascade
control source Connect the
selection, ON= upstream
auto/cascade output
SV_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin Related
by PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV,
selection controlled SWSV
by SWSV
Connect the
upstream
MV lock increase
output.
(MV cannot
SWINC － Input Pin enabled when
Increase), ON= lock
function block
increase
is automatic or
cascade
Connect to
measuring
point AI,
Anti-integral
Related
saturation input,
SWDEC － Input Pin parameter:
used for control
BKIN; Refer to
overshoot
2.1.4
Integral Limits
Action
Connect the
upstream
MV lock decrease
output.
(MV cannot
HOLD － Input Pin enabled when
decrease), ON=
function block
Lock decrease
is automatic or
cascade
Connect to
PID operation output electric
MV － Output Pin
value manual
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Block, Related
Output
parameter:
Pin
BK_OPT
Connect to the
Feedback status BKINERR of
BKOUTERR － Output Pin
value Upstream
Block
BKOUT value switch Related
Configuration
BK_OPT (ON=track PV, － parameter:
Parameter
OFF=track SV) BKOUT
PID
Param Operation
PB Proportion band size TRUE Refer to 2.1.8
Settings Parameter

Balance time
Operation without
TB Balance time (s) TRUE
Parameter interference
switch

145
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
TD =0,
Operation Suppress
TD Derivative time (s) TRUE
Parameter deviation
Action
Refer to
general PID
Derivative filter Operation
KD TRUE function
coefficient Parameter Note1, Note2,
block
Note3, Note4`

Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Monitoring
IMODE Standby work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
ON=auto return,
Configuration
MODE_OPT OFF=manual return － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
(default)
Manual and auto
Enabled when
Operator switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=O
Comma OFF=manual, Parameter
FF
nd ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
Operation Enabled when
SWSV selection: OFF=auto, －
Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to equal to
Related
preset MV value Operation
SWMMV TRUE parameter:
when switch to Parameter
MMV
manual status
Preset MV value Operation Enabled when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON
SV for loop closed Operation
SV － Refer to 2.1.3
control Parameter
Output value=
Operation
MANMV Manual output value － MANMV in
Parameter
manual mode
Operator
Data Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
Operation Note2
MR Manual Set Value － Refer to
Parameter
PV HH limit alarm Operation
Input PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Alarm
PV H limit alarm Operation
Settings PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value alarm Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm set Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter

146
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Deviation filter time Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
constant(s) Parameter
Valve position
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position error
Operation
TMFHYS alarm hysteresis TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
time
Bypass PID
When cascade
operation, when
adjusting,
BYPASS=ON,
Operation used to excise
BYPASS excise PID TRUE
Parameter inner loop
calculation, switch
when it fails
SV to MV directly for
Refer to 2.1.4
output
Proportion suppress
switch, when Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPP=ON, stop Parameter
integral action
Enable switch, when
Operation Related
SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband enable
Operation Enable when
DB Deadband band size TRUE
Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
Advance DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
d Param
Settings Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range
Nonlinear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient[0,1.0] Parameter
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the relation Related
between error and parameters:
output change value GW, PB and
to nonlinear. Used KN When
for control when Configuration
NGN_OPT － NGN_OPT＝
proportional gain Parameter
ON; GW and
needs nonlinear
PB when
change.
OFF=Error square NGN_OPT＝
root function, OFF
ON=Gap action
function
PVHH alarm Monitoring
Alarm PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter

147
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive deviation Monitoring
PEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
Negative deviation Monitoring
NEIIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm indication Parameter
MV positive rate limit Monitoring
DMVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position error
Monitoring
NMFIND negative alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Valve position error
Monitoring
PMFIND positive alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Refer to 2.1.2
Input compensation Operation
IK TRUE Related
gain Parameter
parameter: IA
Refer to 2.1.2
Input compensation Operation
IB TRUE Related
Compen bias value Parameter
parameter: IA
sation
Settings Refer to 2.1.4
Output Operation
OK TRUE Related
compensation gain Parameter
parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation bias TRUE Related
Parameter
value parameter: OA
Set MV
manual slow
increase/decre
Fase/Slo ase
w/Increa percentage in
MV manual slow
se/Decre Operation function block
SMV increase/decrease TRUE
ase Parameter properties
value (%)
Settings setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH

148
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set MV
manual fast
increase/decre
ase
MV manual fast percentage in
Operation
FMV increase/decrease TRUE function block
Parameter
value (%) properties
setting
Related
parameter:
MVSCL
Set SV manual
slow
increase/decre
ase
percentage in
SV slow
Operation function block
SSV increase/decrease TRUE
Parameter properties
value (%)
setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decre
ase
SV fast percentage in
Operation
FSV increase/decrease TRUE function block
Parameter
value (%) properties
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Extended range
Configuration
Extende HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
d Range percentage
Settings Extended range Configuration
LORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
minimum percentage Parameter
SV ramp function
switch. When Related
changing set value, parameter:
SV incline it to SV RAMP. Enable
Advance Operation
SWRAMP according to the set TRUE when in
Settings Parameter
RAMP (s). automatic or
OFF=SV ramp cascade
function off, ON=SV mode.
ramp function on
Related
Operation
RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE parameter:
Parameter
SWRAMP

149
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV= Configuration
SVTR_OPT － Refer to 2.1.3
range limit. Used to Parameter
prevent the output
MV from interference
when changing the
control mode.
Suppress module
Alarm Operation
AOF alarm, On=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled Parameter
to display alarm.
and
Alarm
Suppres ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
s
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode setting
Operation the first time of
SWOOS switch (ON= OOS TRUE
Parameter function block
mode)
downloading
Related
OOS mode output Operation parameter:
OOS OOSVAL TRUE
value Parameter OOS_OPT=O
Settings N
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON, Configuration
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=OOSVAL, when Parameter
OOS_OPT =OFF,
maintain the MV

Note 1: Principle Instruction

Figure 2-34 PD control FB algorithm process with manipulating set integral item

The proportional band can be set narrower via executing proportional differential control, and
suppress overshoot via differential action to shift phase and achieve better control performance.

TD
MV  K P * K S * ( E n  * PVn )  MR  BLn
T

Among them: the formulas of EIn, KP and KS refer to 2.8.1 Note 1.

150
 Function Block Reference

T
BLn  (1  ) * BLn 1
Tbl

PVn  PVn  PVn -1

BLn is balance option, which is used to bumpless transfer revising variables from manual mode to
auto mode. Tbl is balance time. Ks is range conversion coefficient. In the mode of AUT or CAS,
CALCn is conversed to MV output by output process.

Note 2: Bumpless transfer

Bumpless transfer of PD_SI function block is based on balance movement. When function block is
transferred from manual mode (MAN) to auto mode (AUTO), BLn 0 as initial value of balance item
is obtained by the following expression to achieve bumpless transfer.

TD
BLn 0  MV  K P * K S * ( E n  * PV n)  MR
T

Figure 2-35 Bumpless transfer figure of balance movement of PD_SI function block

151
 Function Block Reference

2.9.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-33 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference [SVSCL,SVSC
(%) HH PVHH 100.000 (select alarm
H]
enabled, or it is
disabled).

152
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVSC
H PVH 90.000 PV(select alarm
H]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVSC
L PVL 10.000 PV(select alarm
H]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
[SVSCL,SVSC
LL PVLL 0.000 (select alarm
H]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSC
H SVH 40.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSC
L SVL 0.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[MVSCL,MVSC
H MVH 100.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[MVSCL,MVSC
L MVL 0.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
EI Alarm (%) Bias SV(select alarm
EI 0.000 －
(EI) enabled, or it is
disabled).
PEI Selecting the
(selec － － － positive deviation
ted) alarm is enabled.
NEI Selecting the
(selec － － － negative deviation
ted) alarm is enabled.

153
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
DLHY Deviation alarm
DLHYS 0.000 －
S hystersis value
Selecting the
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － positive deviation
alarm is enabled.
MF Alarm Selecting the
(%) NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
TMFH
TMFHYS 0.000 － Lag time SV
YS (s)
DMV
Selecting positive
H
－ － － velocity alarm is
(selec
enabled.
ted)
MV Velocity
Limits (%) DMVL Selecting negative
(selec － － － velocity alarm is
ted) enabled.
DMVL Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
IM limit SV
PID PB(% Loop proportional
PB 100.000 －
PID ) parameter SV
Parameter Loop differential
TD(s) TD 0.000 －
time parameter SV
Incomplete Incomplete integral
KD(s) KD 10.000 －
Diff Coef filter coefficient
Enabl
Selecting deadband
e
SWDB － － parameter is
(selec
enabled.
ted)
Disabl
Selecting deadband
Deadband e
SWDB √ － parameter is
(%) (selec
disabled.
ted)
Deadband band
DB DB 0.000 －
size
DBHY Deadband band
DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
S hysteresis
Gap Read-only,
Action non-linear gain
NGN_OPT － －
(selec selection switch
ted) ON= Gap Action
Squar Read-only,
e non-linear gain
Non-linear Root NGN_OPT √ － selection switch
Gain (%) (selec OFF=Square Root
ted) Action
Nonlinear gain
GW GW 0.000 [0,1.0]
action range
Nonlinear gain
KN KN 1.000 －
coefficient

154
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Balance Balance time
Balan
Switch TB 0.000 Not less than 0 without interference
ce (s)
Coefficient switch
Enabl
e Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP － －
(selec is enabled.
ted)
SV Ramp Disabl
Action (%) e Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP √ －
(selec is disabled.
ted)
RAM Coefficient
RAMP 100.000 －
P parameter SV
Direct
Selecting direct
(selec SWPN － －
action is enabled.
ted)
Control
Direction Rever
se Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(selec action is enabled.
ted)
Run Selecting
(selec STOPP √ － proportional action
Proportional ted) is enabled.
Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action
is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
PID Action
The modification of
function block panel
Bypas is disabled for
BYPASS － －
s function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
Input or program
Compensati Input compensation
on (%) IK IK 1.000 －
gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
or program
Output
Compensati Output
OK OK 1.000 －
on (%) compensation gain
Output
DB DB 0.000 － compensation bias
value

155
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Deviation filter
KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
Alarm Limit coefficient
Settings TSV(s Deviation filter time
TSV(s) 0.000 0~1000s
) constant(s)
Read-only, can be
PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration
Feedback or program
Output Track Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Track
Read-only, can be
Not
SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
Track
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
MAN_OPT or program
Setting Read-only, can be
Progr
MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
am
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
SV_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Progr
SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
am
or program
MR
MR (%) MR 0.000 0~100 －
(%)

TV Read-only, track
TV (%) TV 0.000 －
(%) input value (%)

2.9.3 Flag
Table 2-34 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tracking (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm(PVL)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)

156
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D16 Disable PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 Disable NEI Alarm (NEI)
D18 Disable Alarm When Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
Alarm of MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22 Disable
(DMVH)
Alarm of MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23 Disable
(DMVL)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D27 Disable Alarm with Valve Position Deviation Negative (NMF)
D28 Disable Alarm with Valve Position Deviation Positive (PMF)

2.10 Error Cumulation PI Control Function Block (PI_AE)

PI_AE is used for multivariate flow control to maintain total flux value, which is calculated
according to certain proportion of flux of each part.

Proportional and integral control is implemented by PI_AE function block, based on accumulation
deviation. Accumulation deviation value DV is obtained by summing the difference between
process value PV and set value SV in each scan period. And the sum of difference is conversed
time range.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 120μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.10.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-35 Parameter instruction and application of PI_AE Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as

Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual value
Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuration
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual value
Parameter
L limit.
The same as
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － PV actual value
Parameter
H limit.

157
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － PV actual value
Parameter
L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
SVH SV H limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
Value range
Operation
SVL SV L limit value TRUE [SVSCL,SVSC
Parameter
H]
MV output rate
Limits variety limit
value. Used to
Operation
DMVLIM prevent the MV TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
from overlarge
modification in a
short time.
Control
Deviation alarm
SV. Error alarm
is performed for
Cumulation Error Operation
VL TRUE accumulation
Limit Parameter
error value, not
for the current
error value.
Refer to Note2

158
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
Direct/Re OFF=Direct
the increasing of
verse Operation action,
SWPN PV in direct TRUE
Switch Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
Settings action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Parameters BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
block
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
Process value of Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin measuring point
control process AI
Connect to
outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
control value
Base MV
Input Pin Connect to
Settings Track input value measuring point
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin AI. Related
MV=TV ) parameter:
SWTR.
Upstream
Track switch: interlock
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin condition input,
ON=track Related
parameter: TV
Connect to
Output measuring point
compensation, AI (feedforward
OA used for － Input Pin signal),
feedforward Related
control parameter: OK,
OB
Advance PID executor
Connect to
Input Pin feedback value ,
MF － Input Pin measuring point
Settings used for
AI
monitoring
Input
Connect to
compensation
measuring point
value, used to
AI, Refer to
improve the
IA － Input Pin 2.1.2
controllability of
Related
process with
parameter: IK,
long deadband
IB
time

159
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Program manual
and auto control
Connect the
switch,
upstream output
PSWAM OFF=program － Input Pin
Enabled when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=ON
ON=program
auto control
Program auto/ Connect the
cascade control upstream output
PSWSV － Input Pin
switch, OFF= enabled when
SV, ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON
Manual-automati
c control source
switch, ON=
Connect the
manual-automati
upstream output
c selection
Related
MAN_OPT controlled by － Input Pin
parameter:
PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM,
manual-automati
SWAM
c selection
controlled by
SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON=
auto/cascade Connect the
selection upstream output
SV_OPT controlled by － Input Pin Related
PSWSV, OFF= parameter:
auto/cascade PSWSV, SWSV
selection
controlled by
SWSV
Connect the
MV lock upstream
increase (MV output. enabled
SWINC cannot － Input Pin when function
Increase), ON= block is
lock increase automatic or
cascade
Connect to
measuring point
Anti-integral AI, Related
saturation input, parameter:
RRL － Input Pin
used for control BKIN; Refer to
overshoot 2.1.4
Integral Limits
Action
Connect the
MV lock upstream
decrease (MV output. enabled
SWDEC cannot － Input Pin when function
decrease), ON= block is
Lock decrease automatic or
cascade

160
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV holds the
current output Connect to
HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin upstream
the current output,
output value
Connect to
PID operation
MV － Output Pin electric manual
output value
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Block, Related
Output parameter:
Pin BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTER Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
R value
Upstream Block
BKOUT value
Related
switch Configuration
BK_OPT － parameter:
(ON=track PV, Parameter
BKOUT
OFF=track SV)
Proportion band Operation
PB TRUE
size Parameter
Balance time
Operation without
TB Balance time (s) TRUE
Parameter interference
PID switch
Param
Settings Operation
TI Integral time (s) TRUE
Parameter
Change the
Time switching
Operation time unit into
TK coefficient (No TRUE
Parameter second.
less than 0.05)
Refer to Note1
Operator Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Command Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
ON=auto return,
MODE_OP Configuration
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.1.1
T Parameter
return (default)
Manual and auto
Enabled when
switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=OF
OFF=manual, Parameter
F
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Whether to
equal to preset Related
Operation
SWMMV MV value when TRUE parameter:
Parameter
switch to manual MMV
status
Preset MV value
Operation Enabled when
MMV (switch to TRUE
Parameter SWMMV=ON
manual)

161
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Reset Operation
RST TRUE
cumulation error Parameter
Whether to
equal to preset
MV value when
switch to auto
status. PMV
enable switch. Related
Operation
SWPMV When TRUE parameter:
Parameter
SWPMV=ON, PMV
MV = PMV, MV
velocity alarm,
lock
increase/decrea
se are disabled
Preset MV when
switching from
OOS/IMAN/TR/ Operation Enabled when
PMV TRUE
MAN modes to Parameter SWPMV=ON
AUTO or CAS
mode
SV for loop Operation
SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
closed control Parameter
Output value=
Manual output Operation
MANMV － MANMV in
value Parameter
manual mode
Monitoring
EI Error － Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
Operator Control error
Data DV resets when:
The cumulation
error reset
Cumulation
switch RST set
Monitoring error value, can
DV as ON; －
Parameter be set in
Function block
program
mode is manual;
In the mode of
process variable
track
Input PV HH limit Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm alarm value Parameter
Settings PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DL TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
set value Parameter
Deviation alarm Operation
DLHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hystersis value Parameter
Deviation filter Operation
KSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient Parameter

162
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Deviation filter Operation
TSV TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
time constant(s) Parameter
Valve position
Operation
NMFLIM negative error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
PMFLIM positive error TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
thresholds
Valve position
Operation
TMFHYS error alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
hysteresis time
Bypass PID
operation, when When cascade
Advanced BYPASS=ON, adjusting, used
Calculatio excise PID Operation to excise inner
BYPASS TRUE
n Settings calculation, Parameter loop when it
switch SV to MV fails
directly for Refer to 2.1.4
output
Proportion
suppress switch,
when Operation
STOPP TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPP=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action
Integral
suppress switch,
when Operation
STOPI TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
STOPI=ON, Parameter
stop integral
action
Enable switch,
when
Operation Related
SWDB SWDB=ON, TRUE
Parameter parameter: DB
deadband
enable
Deadband band Operation Enable when
DB TRUE
size Parameter SWDB=ON
Deadband band Operation
DBHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
hysteresis Parameter
Non-linear gain
Operation
GW range non-linear TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
Parameter
gain range
Nonlinear gain Operation
KN TRUE Refer to 2.1.4
coefficient[0,1.0] Parameter

163
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Non-linear gain
selection switch,
switch the
relation between Related
error and output parameters:
change value to GW, PB and KN
nonlinear. Used When
for control when Configuration
NGN_OPT － NGN_OPT＝
proportional gain Parameter
ON; GW and
needs nonlinear
PB when
change.
OFF=Error NGN_OPT＝
square root OFF
function,
ON=Gap action
function
Control output
type:
OFF=position Configuration Related
OUT_OPT －
type, Parameter parameter: MV
ON=increment
type
Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Positive
Monitoring
PEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Negative
Monitoring
NEIIND deviation alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV positive rate Monitoring
DMVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Valve position
Monitoring
NMFIND error negative － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Valve position
Monitoring
PMFIND error positive － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
alarm indication
Control error H Monitoring
AEHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm Parameter

164
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Control error L Monitoring
AELIND － Refer to 2.1.6
alarm Parameter
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: IA
Input Refer to 2.1.2
Operation
IB compensation TRUE Related
Compens Parameter
bias value parameter: IA
ation
Settings Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OK compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
gain parameter: OA
Output Refer to 2.1.4
Operation
OB compensation TRUE Related
Parameter
bias value parameter: OA
Set MV manual
slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual slow in function block
Operation
SMV increase/decrea TRUE properties
Parameter
se value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual fast
Operation in function block
FMV increase/decrea TRUE
Parameter properties
se value (%)
setting
Related
Fase/Slo parameter:
w/Increas MVSCL
e/Decreas Set SV manual
e Settings slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
SV slow in function block
Operation
SSV increase/decrea TRUE properties
Parameter
se value (%) setting
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
SV fast
Operation in function block
FSV increase/decrea TRUE
Parameter properties
se value (%)
setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL

165
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Extended range
Configuration
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
Extended Parameter
percentage
Range
Settings Extended range
Configuration
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
Parameter
percentage
SV ramp
function switch.
When changing
Related
set value, incline
parameter:
it to SV
Operation RAMP. Enable
SWRAMP according to the TRUE
Parameter when in
set RAMP (s).
automatic or
OFF=SV ramp
cascade mode
function off,
ON=SV ramp
function on

SV Related
Operation
Advance RAMP Ramp coefficient TRUE parameter:
Parameter
Settings SWRAMP
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_OP range limit. Used Configuration
－ Refer to 2.1.3
T to prevent the Parameter
output MV from
interference
when changing
the control
mode.
Suppress
Alarm module alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled On=prohibit to Parameter
and display alarm.
Suppress ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at
OOS setting switch Operation the first time of
Settings SWOOS TRUE
(ON= OOS Parameter function block
mode) downloading
Related
OOS mode Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
output value Parameter
OOS_OPT=ON

166
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OOS
mode
output
value
type.
when
OOS_
OPT
=ON, Configuration
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=O Parameter
OSVAL
, when
OOS_
OPT
=OFF,
maintai
n the
MV

Note 1. PI control with cumulative departure

DVRn  DVRn1  ( SVn  PVn )

DVRn
DVn  * TS
TK

DVRn is original cumulative departure value;

DVRn1 is original cumulative departure value of front cyclic

Time conversion coefficient converses original accumulation deviation value of flow unit (m3/h) to
weight or volume unit (m3). Time conversion coefficient converses time unit of flow to second, for
example, if unit of PV is m3/h, TK is set 3600.

Calculation expression of control algorithm of PI_AE function block:

KP * KS T
MVn  * (T * E n  * ES n )  BLn
8 TI

Instruction of EIn, KP and KS refer to 2.8.1 Note1

Control accumulation deviation value ESn used for PI control calculation is equal to the value of
accumulation deviation DVn limited by set value of control deviation alarm VL.

When DVn  VL , ES n  VL * TK .

When  VL  DVn  VL , ES n  DVRn * TS .

167
 Function Block Reference

When DVn   VL , ES n   VL * TK

Note 2. Control deviation alarm

Control deviation alarm is used to check whether accumulation deviation value DV which
continues to add after accumulation deviation alarm is over absolute value of set value of control
deviation alarm VL. If exceeded, the control deviation alarm is generated.

If accumulation deviation value DV is over absolute value of set value of control deviation VL
positively, positive alarm of control alarm AEH is generated; if accumulation deviation value DV is
over set value of control deviation VL negatively, negative alarm of control deviation AEL is
generated.

168
 Function Block Reference

2.10.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-36 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
Prefere PV Alarm setting of loop PV
[SVSCL,SVSCH
nce (%) HH PVHH 100.000 (select alarm
]
enabled, or it is
disabled).

169
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVSCH
H PVH 90.000 PV(select alarm
]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
[SVSCL,SVSCH
L PVL 10.000 PV(select alarm
]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
[SVSCL,SVSCH
LL PVLL 0.000 (select alarm
]
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSCH
H SVH 40.000 is disabled).
]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSCH
L SVL 0.000 is disabled).
]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[MVSCL,MVSC
H MVH 100.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[MVSCL,MVSC
L MVL 0.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only. EI=PV－
EI Alarm SV(select alarm
(%) EI EI 0.000 －
enabled, or it is
disabled).
Selecting the
PEI
－ － － positive deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.
Selecting the
NEI
－ － － negative deviation
(selected)
alarm is enabled.

170
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
± (Range H-
DL DL 100.000 Deviation alarm SV
Range L)
Deviation alarm
DLHYS DLHYS 0.000 －
hystersis value
Selecting the
PMF PMFLIM 100.000 － positive deviation
alarm is enabled.
MF Alarm
Selecting the
(%)
NMF NMFLIM 100.000 － negative deviation
alarm is enabled.
TMFHYS TMFHYS 0.000 － Lag time SV
Selecting positive
DMVH
－ － － velocity alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
MV
Velocity Selecting negative
DMVL
Limits (%) － － － velocity alarm is
(selected)
enabled.
Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM DMVLIM 100.000 －
limit SV
PID Loop proportional
PID PB(%) PB 100.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
Paramete
r Loop integral time
TI(s) TI 20.000 Not less than 0
parameter SV
Selecting deadband
Enable
SWDB － － parameter is
(selected)
enabled.
Selecting deadband
Disable
Deadband SWDB √ － parameter is
(selected)
(%) disabled.
Deadband band
DB DB 0.000 －
size
Deadband band
DBHYS DBHYS 0.000 [0,DB]
hysteresis
Balance time
Balance TB TB 0.000 Not less than 0 without interference
Switch switch
Coefficien
t Change the time
TK TK 1.000 －
unit into second.
Read-only,
Gap non-linear gain
NGN_OPT － －
(selected) selection switch
ON= Gap Action
Read-only,
Square non-linear gain
Non-linear Root NGN_OPT √ － selection switch
Gain (%) (selected) OFF=Square Root
Action
Nonlinear gain
GW GW 0.000 －
action range
Nonlinear gain
KN KN 1.000 －
coefficient
SV Ramp Enable Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP － －
Action (%) (selected) is enabled.

171
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Disable Selecting SV ramp
SWRAMP √ －
(selected) is disabled.
Coefficient
RAMP RAMP 100.000 －
parameter SV
Direct Selecting direct
SWPN － －
Control (selected) action is enabled.
Direction Reverse Selecting reverse
SWPN √ －
(selected) action is enabled.
Selecting
Run
STOPP √ － proportional action
(selected)
Proportion is enabled.
al Action Selecting
Stop STOPP － － proportional action
is disabled.
Selecting integral
Run STOPI √ －
Integral action is enabled.
Action Selecting integral
Stop STOPI － －
action is disabled.
The modification of
function block panel
is enabled for
Run BYPASS √ －
function block
properties interface
PID when debugging.
Action The modification of
function block panel
is disabled for
Bypass BYPASS － －
function block
properties interface
when debugging.
Read-only, can be
Others IA IA 0.000 － set in configuration
Input or program
Compens Input compensation
ation (%) IK IK 1.000 －
gain
Input compensation
IB IB 0.000 －
bias value
Read-only, can be
OA OA 0.000 － set in configuration
or program
Output
Compens Output
OK OK 1.000 －
ation (%) compensation gain
Output
DB DB 0.000 － compensation bias
value
Deviation filter
KSV KSV 1.000 0~100
EI Alarm coefficient
Settings Deviation filter time
TSV(s) TSV(s) 0.000 0~1000s
constant(s)
Feedback Read-only, can be
Output PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration
Track or program

172
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Not Track SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
MAN_OP or program
T Settings Read-only, can be
Program MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
SV_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Program SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
DV DV 0.000 － set in configuration
or program
Control Enabled when
AEH AEH － －
Bias selected H alarm
Alarm Enabled when
AEL AEL － －
selected L alarm
Control Bias Alarm
VL VL 100.000 Not less than 0
SV
Read-only, track
TV (%) TV (%) TV (%) 0.000 －
input value(%)
2.10.3 Flag
Table 2-37 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Manual Initialise(IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tracking (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)

173
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D16 Disable PEI Alarm (PEI)
D17 Disable NEI Alarm (NEI)
D18 Disable Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D20 Disable Alarm for Control Deviation High (AEH)
D21 Disable Alarm for Control Deviation Low (AEL)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D22 Disable
(DMVH)
Alarm for MV Negative Velocity Amplitude Limiting
D23 Disable
(DMVL)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D27 Disable Alarm for Valve Position Minus Deviation (NMF)
D28 Disable Alarm for Valve Position Positive Deviation (PMF)

2.11 Ratio Control Function Block (RATIO)

Output value of ratio setting function block (RATIO) is changed with the value of PV multiplied by
set value of ratio. Ratio setting function block is used to control two variables at setting ratio.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 60μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.11.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-38 Parameter instruction and application of RATIO Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as MV

MV high Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH － actual value H
scale Parameter
limit.
The same as MV
MV low Configuration
MVSCL － actual value L
scale Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
SV high Configuration
SVSCH － actual value H
scale Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － actual value L
Parameter
limit.

174
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set in the
function block
SV engineer Configuration
SVEU － properties
unit Parameter
settings
interface.
Set in the
function block
MV engineer Configuration
MVEU － properties
unit Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal Configuration
MVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Value range
MV H limit Operation
MVH TRUE [MVSCL,MVSCH
value Parameter
]
Value range
MV L limit Operation
MVL TRUE [MVSCL,MVSCH
value Parameter
]
SV H limit Operation Value range
SVH TRUE
value Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
SV L limit Operation Value range
SVL TRUE
Limits value Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
MVoutput
rate variety
limits value.
Used to
prevent the Operation
DMVLIM TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
MV from Parameter
overlarge
modification
in a short
time.
Base Connect to
Extend Feedback BKOUT of
Input Pin BKIN － Input Pin
Parameter input downstream
Settings
block
Connect to
Feedback BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
status input downstream
block ERR
Process
value of loop Connect to
PV closed － Input Pin measuring point
control AI
process
Connect to outer
CSV Cascade － Input Pin loop control value
MV

175
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
Track input measuring point
value (In AI.
TV － Input Pin
track mode, Related
MV=TV ) parameter:
SWTR.
Upstream
Track switch:
interlock
OFF=not
SWTR － Input Pin condition input,
track,
Related
ON=track
parameter: TV
Program
manual and
auto control
switch, Connect the
OFF=progra upstream output
PSWAM － Input Pin
m manual Enabled when
control, MAN_OPT=ON
ON=progra
m auto
control
Program
auto/
Connect the
cascade
upstream output
PSWSV control － Input Pin
enabled when
switch,
SV_OPT=ON
OFF= SV,
ON=CSV
Manual-auto
matic control
source
switch, ON=
Advance manual-auto
Input Pin matic Connect the
Settings selection upstream output
MAN_OPT controlled by － Input Pin Related
PSWAM, parameter:
OFF= PSWAM, SWAM
manual-auto
matic
selection
controlled by
SWAM
Auto/Cascad
e control
source
selection,
ON=
Connect the
auto/cascad
upstream output
e selection
SV_OPT － Input Pin Related
controlled by
parameter:
PSWSV,
PSWSV, SWSV
OFF=
auto/cascad
e selection
controlled by
SWSV

176
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
PID Connect to
MV operation － Output Pin electric manual
output value instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback Upstream Block,
BKOUT － Output Pin
output value Related
parameter:
Output BK_OPT
Pin Connect to the
Feedback
BKOUTERR － Output Pin BKINERR of
status value
Upstream Block
BKOUT
value switch
Related
(ON=track Configuration
BK_OPT － parameter:
PV, Parameter
BKOUT
OFF=track
SV)
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Standby Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
work mode Parameter
ON=auto
return,
Configuration
MODE_OPT OFF=manua － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
l return
(default)
Manual and
auto switch: Operation Enabled when
SWAM －
OFF=manua Parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
l, ON=auto
Operator Auto/
Command cascade
selection: Operation Enabled when
SWSV －
OFF=auto, Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascad
e
Whether to
equal to
preset MV
Operation Related
SWMMV value when TRUE
Parameter parameter: MMV
switch to
manual
status
Preset MV
Operation Enabled when
MMV value (switch TRUE
Parameter SWMMV=ON
to manual)
SV for loop
Operation
SV closed TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
Parameter
Operator control
Data Output value=
Manual Operation
MANMV － MANMV in
output value Parameter
manual mode
Input PV HH limit Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm alarm value Parameter

177
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Settings PV H limit Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV L limit Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
PV LL limit Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm value Parameter
Process
Operation
PVHYS value alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
hysteresis
Modify
Advance
coefficient Operation
Calculatio BIAS TRUE Refer to Note1
(compensati Parameter
n Settings
on)
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit
Monitoring
PVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
PV L limit
Monitoring
PVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
PV LL limit
Monitoring
PVLLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV H limit
Monitoring
MVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Alarm MV L limit
Monitoring
MVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
SV H limit
Monitoring
SVHIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
SV L limit
Monitoring
SVLIND alarm － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV positive
Monitoring
DMVHIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
MV negative
Monitoring
DMVLIND rate limit － Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
indication
Extended
range Configuration
HORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
maximum Parameter
Extended percentage
Range
Settings Extended
range Configuration
LORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
minimum Parameter
percentage
SV Related
Ramp Operation
Advance RP TRUE parameter:
constant Parameter
Settings SWRAMP

178
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Track PV
switch
enable/disab
le: OFF=not
track,
ON=track. If
PV> SVH/
SVL, SV=
range limit. Configuration
SVTR_OPT － Refer to 2.1.3
Used to Parameter
prevent the
output MV
from
interference
when
changing the
control
mode.
Suppress
module
alarm, Operation
Alarm AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
On=prohibit Parameter
Enabled to display
and alarm.
Suppress
Alarm
ENALM TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
enable
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at the
setting Operation first time of
SWOOS TRUE
switch (ON= Parameter function block
OOS mode) downloading
Related
OOS mode Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
output value Parameter
OOS_OPT=ON
OOS mode
OOS
output value
Settings
type. when
OOS_OPT
=ON,
Configuration
OOS_OPT MV=OOSVA － Refer to 1.1.1
Parameter
L, when
OOS_OPT
=OFF,
maintain the
MV

Note 1. Calculate ratio

Ratio is calculated according to the following expression:

MV n  SV e * ( PV n  SVSCL ) * KS  BIAS  MVSCL

SVe : Valid set value of ratio which is enabled set value of ratio after set value of ratio SV is
implemented ramp process of set value. Ramp process of set value is used for bumpless transfer
of function block mode.

179
 Function Block Reference

As the PV and MV are the actual values, when the maximum and minimum rages of PV and MV,
the value of KS (range) changes. The engineering unit of BIAS is the same as MV.

Note 2. Bumpless transfer

Bumpless transfer indicates that output value will not be mutant in the mode of transfer function
block. The movement of bumpless transfer which is selected automatically will be different with
difference of output movement and control mode. There are two bumpless transfer modes for
RATIO function block: ratio track and ramp movement of set value of ratio.

 Ratio track

When ratio calculation is stopped, set value of ratio SV is calculated according to output value MV,
by which bumpless transfer from manual mode to auto mode can be achieved.

1
SV  ( MV  MVSCL  BIAS ) *
( PV  SVSCL) * KS

The function of ratio track can be implemented in manual mode (MAN). If ( PV  SVSCL) * KS  0 ,
SV=SVH.

 Ramp movement of set value of ratio

When set value of ratio SV is changed, change of set value of valid ratio SVe in per second is
limited to be less than or equal to ramp constant RP by ramp movement of set value of ratio. When
function block mode is transferred from manual mode to auto mode, SVe calculated according to
MV is initial value of set value of valid ratio. And when set value SV is changed, ramp action of
ratio set value works.

180
 Function Block Reference

2.11.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-39 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
(%)
enabled, or it is
disabled).

181
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
HYS PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
DMVH Selecting positive
(select － － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
DMVLIM DMVL Selecting negative
Settings (select － － velocity alarm is
ed) enabled.
DMVLI Loop MV velocity
DMVLIM 100.000 －
M limit SV
Feedback Read-only, can be
Track PV BK_OPT － － set in configuration
or program

182
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Application
Panel Parameter Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only, can be
SV BK_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
Read-only, can be
Track SVTR_OPT √ － set in configuration
or program
SV Track
Read-only, can be
Not
SVTR_OPT － － set in configuration
Track
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel MAN_OPT √ － set in configuration
MAN_OP or program
T Settings Read-only, can be
Progra
MAN_OPT － － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, can be
Panel SV_OPT － － set in configuration
SV_OPT or program
Settings Read-only, can be
Progra
SV_OPT √ － set in configuration
m
or program
Read-only, track
TV TV TV 0.000 －
input value(%)
Related parameter:
RAMP RAMP RAMP 100.000 No less than 0
SWRAMP
2.11.3 Flag
Table 2-40 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Man Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tracking (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable PV HH Limit Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Limit Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm (MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D18 Disable Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal(REVSCL)
D19 Disable Configuration Error Alarm (CFGEER)
Alarm for MV Positive Velocity Amplitude
D22 Disable
Limiting(DMVH)
D23 Disable Alarm for MV Negative Amplitude Limiting(DMVL)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)

183
 Function Block Reference

2.11.4 Application Example

Two liquids should be mixed by a ratio of F1/F2=1.4 to produce a new product. Suppose the flow
F1 is measured by tag FL001 and F2 is measured by tag FL002, the valve is controlled by FC001.

RC FC

F1 F2

产品

Figure 2-36 Ratio control diagram

Figure 2-37 Ratio control program

RATIO function block parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings interface).

FlowControl1

 CSV: 1.4

 SVEU: m3 /s

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FL001)

 SVSCL: (＝range L value of tag FL001)

 MVEU: m3 /s

 MVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FL002)

 MVSCL: (＝range L value of tag FL002)

 Function block parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings interface).
FlowControl2

184
 Function Block Reference

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: m3 /s

 SVSCH: (＝range H value of tag FL002)

 SVSCL:(＝range L value of tag FL002)

 MVEU: %

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

When debugging program, first invoke the function block panel and open the adjusting interface. If
the function block is in IMAN mode, review the tag information of FC001, and adjust the status of
FC001 until FC001.BKOUTERR=OFF, and the FlowControl2 is in MAN mode.

It can be switched manually.

During industrial manufacture, technically there always have 2 or more materials mixed
proportional, wrong proportion will influence manufacture or cause accident. The control system
achieving the proportion for 2 or more parameters is ratio control system.

The master parameter (master momentum) G1 in ratio control system, is leading and not
controlled by ratio control system. The subordinate and controlled material is slave parameter
(slave momentum). Values are controlled to keep G2／G1＝K, i.e. change slave parameter to
reach the ratio with master parameter.

Ratio control system can be divided into single closed loop ratio control system and dual-closed
loop ratio control system by whether the master parameter is adjustable, or divided into static ratio
control system and change ratio control system by whether the ratio K is adjustable.

Figure 2-38 Ratio control

The program is shown in Figure 2-39, which can apply RATIO and PIDEX.

185
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-39 Building ratio control program

Function block instruction and example are shown below:

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

001 FV_2080 AO output Analog output tag
Slave momentum analog
002 FT_2080 AI input
input tag
Master momentum analog
003 FT_2090 AI input
input tag
Proportion control function
004 FIC2080RATIO Function block tag
block tag
PID control function block Reference loop in
005 FIC2080 Function block tag
tag graphics

Parameter settings for PIDEX function block:

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: same with other input PV range unit.

 SVL, SVH: same with SV range if no need SV limit function.

 MODE_OPT: OFF

Parameter settings for RATIO function block:

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: same (unit) with MVSCL, MVSCH, MVEU. Same input PV
range and unit are recommended with PID function block.

 MVL, MVH: same range with MV.

 MODE_OPT: OFF

 MAN_OPT: ON

 PSWAM: ON

Alarm settings:

 When slave momentum (i.e. PID function block) input PV fault, the PID loop enters
into PVERR status, and the loop enters into manual status automatically, PID output
MV keeps the same.

186
 Function Block Reference

 When master momentum (i.e. RATIO function block) input PV fault, the PID loop
enters into SVERR status, and the loop will enter into auto status automatically if in
cascade status, PID SV keeps the same.
 Input PV second level H/L alarm of master and slave momentums are set as required in
RATIO and PID function blocks. Set the deviation alarm for PID loop as required if
have valve position feedback. Disable other alarms.

BKIN should connect the down stream function block BKOUT, BKINERR should connect the down
stream function block BKOUTERR. The down stream function block of proportion control function
block RATIO is PID function block. The down stream function block of PID function block is AO
tag.

Note:

Control panel can call function block name in HMI directly.

2.12 Split Control Function Block (SPLIT)

The input signal is allocated by split control function block according to range of the two output. It
only has the control output action of position type.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 50μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.12.1 Parameter Description

Table 2-41 Parameter instruction and application of SPLIT Function Block

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Basic Range Configurati Make sure that
Parameters Settings SVSCH SV high scale － on SVSCH be greater
Parameter than SVSCL.
Configurati Make sure that
SVSCL SV low scale － on SVSCH be greater
Parameter than SVSCL.
Configurati
MVSC The same as MV1
MV1 high value － on
H1 actual value H limit.
Parameter

187
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Configurati
MVSCL The same as MV1
MV1 low value － on
1 actual value L limit.
Parameter
Configurati
MVSC The same as MV2
MV2 high value － on
H2 actual value H limit.
Parameter
Configurati
MVSCL The same as MV2
MV2 low value － on
2 actual value L limit.
Parameter
Configurati Set in the function
SVEU SV engineer unit － on block properties
Parameter settings interface.
Configurati Set in the function
MV1 actual value
MVEU1 － on block properties
unit
Parameter settings interface.
Configurati Set in the function
MV2 actual value
MVEU2 － on block properties
unit
Parameter settings interface.
Used for data
Configurati
SVDLE SV decimal digits displayed on function
－ on
N [0,5] block panel (equal to 3
Parameter
as default).
Used for data
Configurati
MVDLE MV1 decimal digits displayed on function
－ on
N1 [0,5] block panel (equal to 3
Parameter
as default).
Used for data
Configurati
MVDLE MV2 decimal digits displayed on function
－ on
N2 [0,5] block panel (equal to 3
Parameter
as default).
Configurati
Output1 action
SRH1 － on Refer to Note1, 3
maximum
Parameter
Configurati
Output1 action Note1, 3
Output SRL1 － on Refer to
minimum
Action Parameter
Limit Configurati
Setting Output2 action Note1, 3
SRH2 － on Refer to
maximum
Parameter
Configurati
Output2 action
SRL2 － on Refer to Note1, 3
minimum
Parameter
Operation Value range
MVH1 MV1 H limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
MVL1 MV1 L limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
MVH2 MV2 H limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Limits
Operation Value range
MVL2 MV2 L limit value TRUE
Parameter [MVSCL,MVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVH SV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVL SV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]

188
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Output
1Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV SWPN1＝OFF, direct,
SWPN increases with the Operation
TRUE SWPN1＝ON,
1 increasing of PV in Parameter
direct action, and reverse.
decreases with the
Direct/R increasing of PV in
everse reverse action.
Switch Output
Settings 2Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV SWPN2＝OFF, direct,
SWPN increases with the Operation
TRUE SWPN2＝ON,
2 increasing of PV in Parameter
direct action, and reverse.
decreases with the
increasing of PV in
reverse action.
Extended Connect to outer loop
CSV Cascade － Input Pin
Parameters control value MV
Feedback value1 Connect to
BKIN1 － Input Pin
input downstream BKOUT
Connect to
BKINE Feedback status1
－ Input Pin downstream
RR1 input
BKOUTERR
Feedback value2 Connect to
BKIN2 － Input Pin
Base input downstream BKOUT
Input Pin Connect to
Settings BKINE Feedback status2
－ Input Pin downstream
RR2 input
BKOUTRRR
Connect to measuring
TV1 Track input value 1 － Input Pin
point AI
Connect to measuring
TV2 Track input value 2 － Input Pin
point AI
Track switch: Upstream interlock
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin condition input,
ON=track Related parameter: TV

Program manual and

Advance Connect the upstream
auto control switch,
Input Pin PSWA output
OFF=program －
Settings M Input Pin Enabled when
manual control,
MAN_OPT=ON
ON=program auto
control
Program auto/ Connect the upstream
PSWS cascade control output
－ Input Pin
V switch, OFF= SV, enabled when
ON=CSV SV_OPT=ON

189
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Manual-automatic
control source
switch, ON=
Connect the upstream
manual-automatic
MAN_ output
selection controlled － Input Pin
OPT Related parameter:
by PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM, SWAM
manual-automatic
selection controlled
by SWAM
Auto/Cascade
control source
selection, ON=
Connect the upstream
auto/cascade
SV_OP output
selection controlled － Input Pin
T Related parameter:
by PSWSV, OFF=
PSWSV, SWSV
auto/cascade
selection controlled
by SWSV
Connect to electric
PID operation output
MV1 － Output Pin manual instrument
value 1
Refer to Note1
Connect to electric
PID operation output
MV2 － Output Pin manual instrument
value 2 Note1
Refer to
Output
Pin Connect to the BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream Block,
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Related parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUT Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of Upstream
ERR value
Block
Monitoring
MODE Work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
Monitoring
IMODE Standby work mode － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
ON=auto return, Configurati
MODE
Operator OFF=manual return － on Refer to 2.1.1
_OPT
Comma (default) Parameter
nd Manual and auto
switch: Operation Enabled when
SWAM －
OFF=manual, Parameter MAN_OPT=OFF
ON=auto
Auto/ cascade
Operation Enabled when
SWSV selection: OFF=auto, －
Parameter SV_OPT=OFF
ON=cascade
Output value=
MANM Manual output Operation
－ MANMV in manual
V1 value1 Parameter
mode
Operator
Data MANM Manual output Operation Note1
－ Refer to
V2 value2 Parameter
Operation Value range
SV SV TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Advance Signal distribution Operation Note2
SW TRUE Refer to
Calculati switch Parameter
on Balance ramp Operation Related parameter:
Settings RP1 TRUE
coefficient1 Parameter SW

190
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Balance ramp Operation Related parameter:
RP2 TRUE
coefficient2 Parameter SW
SVHIN SV H limit alarm Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D indication Parameter
SVLIN SV L limit alarm Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D indication Parameter
MV1HI Monitoring
MV1HAlarm － Refer to 2.1.6
ND Parameter
Alarm
MV1LI Monitoring
MV1LAlarm － Refer to 2.1.6
ND Parameter
MV2HI Monitoring
MV2HAlarm － Refer to 2.1.6
ND Parameter
MV2LI Monitoring
MV2LAlarm － Refer to 2.1.6
ND Parameter
Output 1Extended Configurati
HORLI
range maximum － on Refer to 2.1.5
M1
percentage Parameter
Output 1Extended Configurati
LORLI
range minimum － on Refer to 2.1.5
Extende M1
percentage Parameter
d Range
Settings Output 2Extended Configurati
HORLI
range maximum － on Refer to 2.1.5
M2
percentage Parameter
Output 2Extended Configurati
LORLI
range minimum － on Refer to 2.1.6
M2
percentage Parameter
Suppress module
Alarm Operation
AOF alarm,, On=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enabled Parameter
to display alarm
and
Alarm
Suppres ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
s
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at the first
SWOO Function block Operation time of function block
TRUE
S disabled Parameter downloading
Refer to Note5
OOSV OOS mode safe Operation Related parameter:
TRUE
AL1 value 1 Parameter OOS_OPT=ON
OOS OOSV OOS mode safe Operation Related parameter:
Settings TRUE
AL2 value 2 Parameter OOS_OPT=ON
OOS mode output
value type. when
Configurati
OOS_ OOS_OPT =ON,
－ on Refer to 1.1.1
OPT MV=OOSVAL, when
Parameter
OOS_OPT =OFF,
maintain the MV

Note 1. Calculate output value

The two output values MV1 and MV are calculated by SPLIT function block according to SV. Users
can preset range of the output value (SRH1, SRL1, SRH2, SRL2) according to SV. The range of
output value must be in the range of SV and SRH1>SRL1, SRH2>SRL2, SRL1=SVSCL,
SRH2=SVSCH.

191
 Function Block Reference

MV1 and MV2 can be calculated by the following expression:

MVi  CALC i  BLi (n)

When MV is increase output:

MVSCH i  MVSCLi
CALC i  MVSCLi  * ( SV  SRLi )
SRH i  SRLi

When MV is decrease output:

MVSCH i  MVSCLi
CALC i  MVSCH i  * ( SV  SRLi )
SRH i  SRLi

i=1 or 2, and BLi (n) is balance item.

Note 2. Selection Switch (Signal allocation switch)

The function block calculates output value of each output pin according to SV and allocates
signals to output terminals. And output pin can be specified by signal allocation switch.

When SW=0, signal allocation is stopped;

When SW=1, only MV1 is allocated signal;

When SW=2, only MV2 is allocated signal;

When SW=3, the two output pin are allocated signal.

Output pin not selected by SW tracks TV value.

Note 3. Control movement direction

Direct movement: Output value MV changes in the same direction with set value SV.

Reverse movement: Output value MV changes in the reverse direction with set value SV.

Note 4. Limit set value

Set value SV is limited between high limit of set value SVH and low limit of set value SVL.

Low limit of output 1 movement is equal to low limit of set value range;

High limit of output 2 movement is equal to high limit of set value range;

High limit of output 1 movement is less than or equal to high limit of set value range;

192
 Function Block Reference

Low limit of output 2 movement is less than or equal to low limit of set value range.

Note 5. SV fallback

SV fallback function is used to keep set values consistent for bumpless transfer. In auto and
manual mode, CSV is equal to SV. In cascade mode, SV is equal to CSV.

When only one used to output, if it is in auto or manual mode, set value is reversely calculated by
manual value.

When two channels used to output, if it is in the mode of manual or track, set value is reversely
calculated by manual value of two channels. If differential value between reversely calculated SV
and SV is smaller than 1% of the range, reversely calculated SV fallbacks, otherwise does not
fallback.

When MV is direct output:

( MVi  MVSCLi ) * ( SRH i  SRLi )

SVi   SRLi
( MVSCH i  MVSCLi )

When MV is reverse output:

( MVSCH i  MVi ) * ( SRH i  SRLi )

SVi   SRLi
( MVSCH i  MVSCLi )

i=1 or 2.

Note 6. Mode process

When SWOOS is OFF, if BKINERR1 and BKINERR2 are ON, the function block is in IMAN mode;
if one of them is OFF, the function block will be change to other valid mode from IMAN. Output of
the one with value OFF is in manual mode and output value of the one with value ON tracks
corresponding BKIN value.

193
 Function Block Reference

2.12.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-42 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Preference Output1 action
SRH1 SRH1 100.000 －
MV1 Action maximum
Limits (%) Output1 action
SRL1 SRL1 0.000 －
minimum
MV2 Action Output2 action
SRH2 SRH2 100.000 －
Limits (%) maximum

194
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Output2 action
SRL2 SRL2 0.000 －
minimum
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSC
H SVH 100.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limits
selection.
(%)
L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
[SVSCL,SVSC
L SVL 0.000 is disabled).
H]
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV1 (select
alarm enabled, or it
H(MVH [MVSCL,MVSC
MVH1 100.000 is disabled).
1) H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV1 Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV1 (select
alarm enabled, or it
L(MVL [MVSCL,MVSC
MVL1 0.000 is disabled).
1) H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV2 (select
alarm enabled, or it
H(MVH [MVSCL,MVSC
MVH2 100.000 is disabled).
2) H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV2 Limits selection.
(%) L value setting of
loop MV2 (select
alarm enabled, or it
L(MVL [MVSCL,MVSC
MVL2 0.000 is disabled).
2) H]
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Balance ramp
MV Ramp RP1 RP1 100.000 －
coefficient1
Parameter
Settings Balance ramp
RP2 RP2 100.000 －
coefficient2

Output Related parameter:

Others Option Output SW, SW=1,
SW － －
1 distributed to MV1.
MV2 tacks TV2.
Related parameter:
Output SW, SW=2,
SW － －
2 distributed to MV2.
MV1 tacks TV1.

195
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
Related parameter:
SW, SW=3,
Both SW √ －
distributed to two
output points.
Related parameter:
Neither SW － － SW,SW=0,Stop
signal distribution
Panel MAN_OPT √ － OFF=Panel control
MAN_OPT
Settings Progra ON=Program
MAN_OPT － －
m control
Panel SV_OPT － － OFF=Panel control
SV_OPT
Settings Progra ON=Program
SV_OPT √ －
m control
TV1 TV1 0.000 － Track input value 1
TV
TV2 TV2 0.000 － Track input value 2
Output 1
direct/reverse
Direct SWPN1 － －
selection:
OFF=Direct
Output 1
Output
Revers 1direct/reverse
SWPN1 √ －
e selection:
ON=Reverse
Output
2direct/reverse
Direct SWPN2 － －
selection:
OFF=Direct
Output 2
Output
Revers 2direct/reverse
SWPN2 √ －
e selection:
ON=Reverse
2.12.3 Flag
Table 2-43 Flag List

Supervision
Flag Code Description
Assign
D0 Disable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Man Initialize (IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Track (TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D5 Enable (SWSV) Cascade (CAS)
D8 Disable MV1 High Limit Alarm (MVH1)
D9 Disable MV1 Low Limit Alarm (MVL1)
D10 Disable MV2 High Limit Alarm (MVH2)
D11 Disable MV2 Low Limit Alarm (MVL2)
D12 Disable SV High Limit Alarm (SVH)
D13 Disable SV Low Limit Alarm (SVL)
D18 Disable Alarm of Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)

196
 Function Block Reference

Supervision
Flag Code Description
Assign
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression(AOF)
2.12.4 Application Example1

It controls input based on the product output flow in the reaction kettle, and applies two control
valves to ensure the control precision and fast reaction of the valve. The valve for F1 controls via
tag FC001 and is a precision adjust valve. The valve for F2 controls via tag FC002 and is a rough
adjust valve. FO measures via tag FL001.

Figure 2-40 Split control diagram

Figure 2-41 Split control program

Split function block parameter setting (set in the function block properties settings interface).

FeedInControl1

 SRH1: 30

 SRL2: 20

 SVEU: %

 MVEU1: %

197
 Function Block Reference

 MVEU2: %

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

FeedInControl2

 SWPN: ON(reverse action)

 SVEU: m3 /s

 MVEU: %

 Default values of other parameters keep unchanged.

After download, exit FeedInControl1 and FeedInControl2 from OOS mode, debug FeedInControl1
first and then debug FeedInControl2.

When debugging program, first invoke the function block panel and open the adjusting interface. If
the function block is in IMAN mode, review the tag information of FC001 and FC002, and adjust
the status of FC001 and FC002 until FC001.BKOUTERR=OFF, FC002.BKOUTERR=OFF, and the
FlowControl2 is in MAN mode, as shown below. It can be switched manually.

198
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-42 FeedINControl1 in MAN status

2.12.5 Application Example 2

In the split control scheme of steam branch cylinder shown in Figure 2-43, the adjust object is
gas-distributing pressure, executor is enter steam valve (valve A) and vent valve (valve B).

199
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-43 Split control diagram

The action curve is shown below. When PID adjuster outputs 0~50%, valve A acts from wholly
open to wholly closed, valve B is wholly closed. When PID adjuster outputs 50~100%, valve A is
wholly open, and valve B acts from wholly closed to wholly open.

Figure 2-44 Pressure adjusting rules of PIC_2009 gas-distributing cylinder

Build Program

The program can be built by PIDEX (extended PID control function block), SPLIT (split control
function block) and MANUAL (handheld function block). The split point of SPLIT can be set in
range 0-100%. Details are shown below.

200
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-45 Build split control program

Instruction for function block and examples are shown below:

Table 2-44 Instruction for function block and examples

No. Example Type Instruction

01 PI30601 AI Input PV Measuring Value

02 PV30601A AO Output A Valve Control

03 PV30601B AO Output B Valve Control

04 PIC30601 Function Block PID Function Block Tag

Tag
05 PIC30601_SPLIT Function Block Split Control Function Block
Tag Tag
06 HIC30601A Function Block A Valve Handheld Function
Tag Block
Function Block B Valve Handheld Function
07 HIC30601B
Tag Block

Parameter Settings

 PIDEX Function Block Parameter Settings:

 Positive and negative actions should be set as SWPN=OFF (positive).

 SV range L limit SVSCL, high value SVSCH, unit SVEU, should be same with PV
range unit.
 MV range L limit MVSCL, high value MVSCH, unit MVEU, keep the default 0~100%
for adjusting valve.
 SV L limit SVL, H limit SVH, should be same with SV range if SV limit function is not
required, or SV can be set in 0~100.

201
 Function Block Reference

 MV L limit MVL, H limit MVH, keep the default 0 and 100 for adjusting valve if MV
limit function is limited；
 Select PID_OPT as PID type, keep the default PD_I mode (i.e. PID_OPT=2,
proportion differential in advance).
 Back mode MODE_OPT keeps the default manual (i.e. MODE_OPT=OFF).
 Internal/ external set control source SV_OPT keeps the default program control
(SV_OPT=ON).
 Note: SV_OPT settings for above parameters are used to avoid mistake setting loop
as “Cascade” mode on panel.

 SPLIT Function Block Parameter Settings:

 Set operation parameter SWPN1 (output 1 positive/ negative actions select) of

basic parameter as negative (i.e. SWPN1=ON), operation parameter SWPN2
(output 2 positive/ negative actions select) as positive (i.e. SWPN2=OFF).
 Operation action 1 L limit SRL1 applies default value 0, H limit SRH1 is set as split
point 50. Operation action 2 L limit SRL2 is set as split point 50, H limit SRH2
applies default value 100.
 2-channel output range L limits MVSCL1 and MVSCL2, H limits MVSCH1 and
MVSCH2, units MVEU1 and MVEU2 applies default value 0~100%.
 SV range low values SVSCL1 and SVSCL2, high values SVSCH1 and SVSCH2,
unit SVEU applies default value 0~100%.
 Manual/ auto control source MAN_OPT keeps default panel control (i.e.
MAN_OPT=0FF). External set control source SV_OPT keeps default program
settings (i.e. SV_OPT=ON).
 Back mode MODE_OPT can keep the default manual back (i.e. MODE_OPT=OFF),
or set as auto back (i.e. MODE_OPT=ON). If set as auto back, SPLIT function block
can switch its status by the down stream module, and reduce manual operation.

 MANUAL Function Block Parameter Settings:

 Handheld PV range low value PVSCL, high value PVSCH, unit PVEU, MV range
low value MVSCL, high value MVSCH, unit MVEU are all set as 0~100%.
 Manual/auto of handheld selects control source as manual (i.e. MAN_OPT=OFF).
 Note: BKIN of upstream function block should connect BKOUT of down stream
function block, BKINERR should connect BKOUTERR of down stream. The down
stream function block of PID function block is split function block. The down stream

202
 Function Block Reference

function block of split function block is handheld function block. The down stream
function block of handheld function block is AO tag.
Alarm Settings

 Alarm functions of PID function block should set alarm enable and alarm limit as
required.

 Alarm functions of handheld function block should set alarm enable and alarm limit as
required.

Notes

 If input PV has fault, the PID loop enters into PVERR status, the loop enters into manual
status automatically. PID output MV keeps the same.

 Design for split control should judge the positive/ negative output of loop first, then
decide the split interval, such as split point bit 50% (AO output 12mA). Split action
intervals of adjusting valves are generally continuous, while not continuous or
overlapping are also acceptable.

 Split control for 3 or more adjusting valves need to add SPLIT function block, 2-level split.

 Valve position curves of typical dual-adjust valve split control are shown below (not
limited to examples here):

203
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-46Typical split control action relations

 Control panel can call function block name from HMI directly.

2.13 Handheld Function Block (MANUAL)

Auto/manual output can be set by handheld function block. In manual mode, output value can be
tuned; in auto mode, output can be tuned according to input value of upstream FB; In track mode,
output value changes with track value set; The function of forced manual mode is same as manual
mode but this mode cannot be transferred to manual mode and auto mode.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 150μs.

Please refer to the Section 1 and 2.1 before using the function block.

204
 Function Block Reference

2.13.1 Parameters Instruction

Table 2-45 Parameter instruction and application of MANUAL Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as
Configuratio
MVSCH MV high scale － MV actual value
n Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuratio
MVSCL MV low scale － MV actual value
n Parameter
L limit.
The same as
Configuratio
PVSCH PV high scale － PV actual value
n Parameter
H limit.
The same as
Configuratio
PVSCL PV low scale － PV actual value
n Parameter
L limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
Range n Parameter
settings
Settings interface.
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuratio
MVDLEN － function block
Basic [0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to
Parameters 3 as default).
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
PVEU PV engineer unit － properties
n Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
PV decimal digits Configuratio
PVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Value range
[MVSCL,MVSC
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE H]
Parameter
Perform H limits
Output for output value
Limits Value range
[MVSCL,MVSC
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE H]
Parameter
Perform L limits
for output value

205
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Parameters BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
block
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
External loop
Upstream block
IN － Input Pin control value
input value
MV
Base Process value of Connect to
Input Pin PV loop closed control － Input Pin measuring point
Settings process AI
Connect to
measuring point
Track input value
AI
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin
Related
MV=TV )
parameter:
SWTR
Connect to
upstream
Track switch:
interlock
SWTR OFF=not track, － Input Pin
condition input,
ON=track
Related
parameter: TV
Connect to
Advance Forced manual
upstream
Input Pin switch:
EMMAN － Input Pin interlock
Settings OFF=off,
condition input,
ON=manual
Refer to Note1
Program manual and
auto control switch, Connect the
OFF=program upstream output
PSWAM － Input Pin
manual control, Enabled when
ON=program auto MAN_OPT=ON
control
Manual-automatic
control source
Connect the
switch, ON=
upstream output
manual-automatic
Related
MAN_OPT selection controlled － Input Pin
parameter:
by PSWAM, OFF=
PSWAM,
manual-automatic
SWAM
selection controlled
by SWAM
Connect the
MV lock increase
upstream output
(MV cannot
Enabled when
SWINC increase) switch － Input Pin
the function
SWINC=ON, lock
block is auto or
increase
cascade

206
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect the
MV lock decrease upstream
(MV cannot output. enabled
SWDEC decrease) switch － Input Pin when function
SWINC=ON, lock block is
decrease automatic or
cascade
MV holds the current
Connect to
output value, ON=
HOLD － Input Pin upstream
hold the current
output,
output value
Connect to
PID operation output
MV － Output Pin electric manual
value
instrument
Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream
Output BKOUT － Output Pin
value Block, Related
Pin parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTER Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
R value
Upstream Block
MODE Work mode － Output Pin
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Input
Alarm PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Settings value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value alarm Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
hysteresis Parameter
MODE_OP ON=auto return, Configuratio
－ Refer to 2.1.1
T OFF=manual return n Parameter
Balance time
Operation without
TB Balance time TRUE
Parameter interference
Advance switch
Settings Whether to equal to
Related
preset MV value Operation
SWMMV TRUE parameter:
when switch to Parameter
MMV
manual status
Preset MV value Operation Enabled when
MMV TRUE
(switch to manual) Parameter SWMMV=ON

207
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set MV manual
slow
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual slow in function block
Operation
SMV increase/decrease TRUE properties
Parameter
value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
Fase/Slo
parameter:
w/Increas
MVSCH
e/Decreas
e Settings Set MV manual
fast
increase/decrea
se percentage
MV manual fast
Operation in function block
FMV increase/decrease TRUE
Parameter properties
value (%)
setting
Related
parameter:
MVSCL
PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
Manual and auto
Enabled when
switch: Operation
SWAM － MAN_OPT=OF
OFF=manual, Parameter
F
ON=auto
When
Operator SWFIX=ON, not
Command output the
Operation control logic
SWFIX Fix command －
Parameter result of
function block to
downstream
function block
The output
value MV is
Manual equal to manual
Operation
Output MANMV Manual output value － SVMANMV in
Parameter
Value forced manual
or manual
mode.
Extended range
Configuratio
Extended HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
n Parameter
Range percentage
Settings Extended range Configuratio
LORLIM － Refer to 2.1.5
minimum percentage n Parameter

208
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Suppress module
Operation
Alarm AOF alarm, On=prohibit TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
Enabled to display alarm.
and Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Suppress Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at
OOS mode setting
Operation the first time of
SWOOS switch (ON= OOS TRUE
Parameter function block
mode)
downloading
Related
OOS mode output Operation
OOS OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
value Parameter
Settings OOS_OPT=ON
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON, Configuratio
OOS_OPT － Refer to 1.1.1
MV=OOSVAL, when n Parameter
OOS_OPT =OFF,
maintain the MV

Note1: Running mode

Running mode of analogy manual instrument function block: OOS, IMAN, TR, FORCEMAN, MAN,
AUTO.

Priority: OOS > IMAN > TR > EMMAN > MAN/AUTO

EMMAN mode (MODE=9)

In non-track mode, i.e., SWTR=OFF and EMMAN=ON, it is in forced manual mode. The function
is same as manual mode but it only can be transferred to the track mode.

Note2: Balance value= IN-MV when manual/auto switch, if balance time TB is set as larger than
cycle TS value, so MV will be near IN after manual/auto switch, but not become IN directly. Achive
no disturbance function.

209
 Function Block Reference

2.13.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-46 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
HH alarm value
PV setting of loop PV
Preference HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
Alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled).

210
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Application
Panel Parameter Name Initial Value Value Range
Parameter Instruction
Name
H alarm value setting
of loop PV(select
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH]
alarm enabled, or it
is disabled)
L alarm value setting
of loop PV(select
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH]
alarm enabled, or it
is disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
Hystere PV Process value
HYS 0.000 －
sis alarm hysteresis
Balan
ce Balance time without
TB (s) TB (s) 0.000 －
Time interference switch
(s)
Trac Read-only, track
Trac (%) Trac (%) 0.000 －
(%) input value(%)
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH]
is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
MV affected by selection.
Limits
(%) L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH]
is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by selection.
2.13.3 Flag
Table 2-47 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable Manual Initialize(IMAN)
D2 Disable Manual (MAN)
D3 Disable Tracking(TR)
D4 Enable (SWAM) Automatic(AUTO)
D8 Disable PV HH Limit Alarm (PVHH)
D9 Disable PV LL Limit Alarm (PVLL)
D10 Disable PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D11 Disable PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D14 Disable MV High Limit Alarm(MVH)
D15 Disable MV Low Limit Alarm (MVL)
D18 Disable Alarm For Range High/Low Limit Reversal(REVSCL)
D19 Disable Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D24 Disable Force Manual Alarm (EMMAN)

211
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D25 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D26 Disable Listing (FIX)
2.13.4 Application Example

To control the field manual adjusting valve, as shown in the figure below, and it can be displayed
and operated in the diagram.

Handheld can perform open-loop control for analog adjusting target, and is no need to perform the
closed-loop PID control. It is often used for controlling field manual adjusting valve, transducer
rotation setting and other control targets.

Figure 2-47 Diagram of handheld

Its programming is shown below, which can be realized via MANUAL, the interface of host
computer can achieve the control for AO via the tag of function block.

Figure 2-48 Programming of handheld

The function block instruction and examples are shown in the table below.

Table 2-48 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Tag of Function Function Block Tag of
001 HIC_4103
Block Handheld
002 HY_4103 AO (Output) MV

Parameter settings of MANUAL:

 PVSCL: 0~100% in default

 PVSCH: 0~100% in default

 PVEU: 0~100% in default

212
 Function Block Reference

 If measurement value exists, its range should be set as same as the range of PV.

 MVSCL: 0~100% in default

 MVSCH: 0~100% in default

 MVEU: 0~100% in default

 MODE_OPT: OFF

 MAN_OPT: ON

 BKIN should connect with the BKOUT of downstream function block, BKINERR should
connect with the BKOUTERR of downstream function block. AO tag can be the
downstream function block for single loop.

 Set the alarm enabled and limit of alarm function according to the requirements.

The operation parameters MAN_OPT, PSWAM (OFF in default) are set to prevent from wrong
operation to “AUTO” mode by the operator on the panel. The automatic control can be set when
required.

Notice:

The control panel can invoke the name of function block from HMI directly.

2.14 Electric Manual Operation Function Block (MANUAL_EP)

The electric manual operation function block provides six work modes which are OOS, IMAN,
TRACK, OP, MAN, AUTO. In auto mode, output can be tuned according to input value of upstream
FB. In manual mode, output value can be tuned manually. In track mode, output value changes
with track value set. In override mode, output value changes with override input.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 100μs.

Please refer to the 0Section 1 Overview and 2.1 Basic Process of Control Function Block before
using the function block.

213
 Function Block Reference

2.14.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-49 Parameter instruction and application of MANUAL_EP Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as MV
Configuratio
MVSCH MV high scale － actual value H
n Parameter
limit.
The same as MV
Configuratio
MVSCL MV low scale － actual value L
n Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuratio
SVSCH SV high scale － actual value H
n Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuratio
SVSCL SV low scale － actual value L
n Parameter
limit.
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
SVEU SV engineer unit － properties
Range n Parameter
settings
Settings interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuratio
MVEU MV engineer unit － properties
n Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
Basic displayed on
SV decimal digits Configuratio
Parameters SVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV decimal digits Configuratio
MVDLEN － function block
[0,5] n Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Operation Value range
SVH SV H limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Operation Value range
SVL SV L limit value TRUE
Parameter [SVSCL,SVSCH]
Value range
Operation
MVH MV H limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSCH
Parameter
]
Limits Value range
Operation
MVL MV L limit value TRUE [MVSCL,MVSCH
Parameter
]
MV output rate
variety limit value.
Used to prevent
Operation
DMVLIM the MV from TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
overlarge
modification in a
short time.

Base Connect to
Extended BKOUT of
Input Pin BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
Parameters downstream
Settings
block

214
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
input downstream
block ERR
Upstream function External loop
IN － Input Pin
block input value control value MV
Process value of Connect to
PV loop closed － Input Pin measuring point
control process AI
Connect to
upstream
Switch to Manual interlock
TOM － Input Pin
Input condition input,
enabled when it
is ON.
Connect to
upstream
Switch to Auto interlock
TOA － Input Pin
Input condition input,
enabled when it
is ON.
Connect the
OV Override Input － Input Pin upstream output,
Refer to 2.14.1
Upstream
Override Input interlock
OS － Input Pin
Switch condition input,
Refer to Note4
Connect to
measuring point
Track input value
AI.
TV (In track mode, － Input Pin
Related
MV=TV )
parameter:
SWTR.
Connect to
upstream
TR Track Input Switch － Input Pin
interlock
condition input,
Connect the
upstream output,
BSI Bias Input － Input Pin
can be set in
program.
Advance SV SV － Input Pin Refer to 2.1.3
Input Pin
Connect the
Settings
MV lock increase upstream output.
(MV cannot enabled when
SWINC － Input Pin
Increase), ON= function block is
lock increase automatic or
cascade
Connect the
MV lock decrease upstream output.
(MV cannot enabled when
SWDEC － Input Pin
decrease), ON= function block is
Lock decrease automatic or
cascade

215
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV holds the
current output
Connect to
HOLD value, ON= hold － Input Pin
upstream output,
the current output
value
Connect to
PID operation
MV － Output Pin electric manual
output value
instrument
Connect to
downstream
Current bias
BSO － Output Pin input
output
Can be set in
program
Output
Pin Connect to the
BKIN of
Feedback output Upstream Block,
BKOUT － Output Pin
value Related
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback status
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
RR value
Upstream Block
PV HH limit alarm Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
PV H limit alarm Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Input
Alarm PV L limit alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Settings value Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
value Parameter
Process value Operation
PVHYS TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
alarm hysteresis Parameter
When the
upstream input or
inner logic of
Advance Enable or disable Operation function block is
Settings SWBS TRUE
bias in calculation Parameter set as ON, bias is
enabled in
calculation, Refer
Note2
to
When the
upstream input or
Enable or disable
Operation inner logic of
SWTB balance time in TRUE
Parameter function block is
calculation
set as ON, apply
Balance time
Operation
TB Balance time TRUE －
Parameter
ON=auto return
MODE_O Configuratio
OFF=manual － Refer to 2.1.3
PT n Parameter
return (as default)

216
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Track PV switch
enable/disable:
OFF=not track,
ON=track. If PV>
SVH/ SVL, SV=
SVTR_O Configuratio
range limit. Used －
PT n Parameter
to prevent the
output MV from
interference when
changing the
control mode.
Set MV manual
slow
increase/decreas
e percentage in
MV manual slow function block
Operation
SMV increase/decreas TRUE properties
Parameter
e value (%) setting,
SMV≤FMV
Related
parameter:
MVSCH
Set MV manual
fast
increase/decreas
MV manual fast e percentage in
Operation
FMV increase/decreas TRUE function block
Parameter
e value (%) properties setting
Related
Fase/Slo
parameter:
w/Increas
MVSCL
e/Decreas
e Settings Set SV manual
slow
increase/decreas
e percentage in
SV slow
Operation function block
SSV increase/decreas TRUE
Parameter properties setting
e value (%)
SSV≤FSV,
Related
parameter:
SVSCH
Set SV manual
fast
increase/decreas
SV fast e percentage in
Operation
FSV increase/decreas TRUE function block
Parameter
e value (%) properties setting
Related
parameter:
SVSCL
Alarm PVHH alarm Monitoring
PVHHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV H Limit alarm Monitoring
PVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV L limit alarm Monitoring
PVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
PV LL limit alarm Monitoring
PVLLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter

217
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
MV H limit alarm Monitoring
MVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
MV L limit alarm Monitoring
MVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV H limit alarm Monitoring
SVHIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
SV L limit alarm Monitoring
SVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
indication Parameter
DMVHIN MV positive rate Monitoring
－ Refer to 2.1.6
D limit indication Parameter
MV negative rate Monitoring
DMVLIND － Refer to 2.1.6
limit indication Parameter
Operation
MAN Manual switch － Refer to 2.1.1
Operator Parameter
Command Operation
AUTO Auto switch － Refer to 2.1.1
Parameter
The function
block is in MAN
OM Manual output － Output Pin
mode, OM=ON,
or OM=OFF
Connect to
measuring point
AI (feedforward
Output signal),
compensation, Related
Status OA used for － Output Pin parameter: OK,
feedforward OB
control The function
block is in AUTO
mode, OA=ON,
or OA=OFF
Monitoring
MODE Work mode －
Parameter
Standby work Monitoring
IMODE － Refer to 2.1.1
mode Parameter
Manual Output value=
Manual output Operation
Output MANMV － MANMV in
value Parameter
Value manual mode
Extended range
Configuratio
HORLIM maximum － Refer to 2.1.5
n Parameter
percentage
Extended range
Configuratio
LORLIM minimum － Refer to 2.1.5
n Parameter
Extended percentage
Range Suppress module
Settings alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
On=prohibit to Parameter
display alarm.
Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Set as ON at the
OOS OOS mode
Operation first time of
Settings SWOOS setting switch TRUE
Parameter function block
(ON= OOS mode)
downloading

218
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Related
OOS mode output Operation
OOSVAL TRUE parameter:
value Parameter
OOS_OPT=ON
OOS mode output
value type. when
OOS_OPT =ON,
OOS_OP Configuratio
MV=OOSVAL, － Refer to 1.1.1
T n Parameter
when OOS_OPT
=OFF, maintain
the MV

Note 1. Work mode

The electric manual operation function block provides six work modes which are OOS, IMAN, TR,
OS, MAN, AUTO.

Priority: OOS > IMAN > TR > OS> MAN>AUTO.

OS mode (MODE=11)

When SWOOS=OFF, BKINERR=OFF, TR=OFF and OS=ON, the function block is in OS mode,
MV=OV in this case.

Note 2. Bias Output

When SWBS = ON, bias output is enabled.

In MAN mode, BSO = MV-IN, if now SWTB = OFF, BSO will be back written to BSI.

In AUTO mode, MV = BSI + IN, BSO = BSI.

When SWBS = OFF, bias input lock is 0.

Note 3. Balance Process

When it is switched to AUTO mode from other modes, there may be huge bias between the value
calculated from Input IN and the value of original output. In order to make output transition smooth,
use first inertia balance process. The output step is shown as follows:

219
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-9 Balance Process Figure

Note 4. OS logic

OS logic means that when the self-control system receiving abnormal signals, such as accident
alarm, bias alarm and fault, the OS logic will perform logic functions, such as switching auto to
manual, increase priority, decrease priority, increase prohibited, decrease prohibited, etc., and
transform the system to the safe status set previously.

220
 Function Block Reference

2.14.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-50 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Panel
Application
Name Paramete Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
r Name
HH alarm value
PV Alarm setting of loop PV
Preference Limit HH PVHH 100.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
Settings enabled, or it is
disabled).

221
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Paramete Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
r Name
H alarm value
setting of loop
H PVH 90.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
L alarm value
setting of loop
L PVL 10.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] PV(select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
LL alarm value
setting of loop PV.
LL PVLL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] (select alarm
enabled, or it is
disabled)
PV Process value
Hystere PVHYS 0.000 －
alarm hysteresis
H value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H SVH 40.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
SV Limit selection.
Settings L value setting of
loop SV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L SVL 0.000 [SVSCL,SVSCH] is disabled).
Note: SV limit is not
affected by
selection.
H value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
H MVH 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
MV Limit selection.
Settings L value setting of
loop MV (select
alarm enabled, or it
L MVL 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] is disabled).
Note: MV limit is not
affected by
selection.
Read-only, Bias
BSI BSI 0.000 －
Input
Read-only,
Mode IN IN 0.000 － Upstream function
block input value
Read-only, Override
OV OV 0.000 －
Input

222
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Paramete Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
r Name
Can only debug in
custom program,
Keep HOLD Off ON/OFF Select it and the
indicator on panel is
ON.
Can only debug in
Lock custom program,
Options Increase SWINC Off ON/OFF Select it and the
indicator on panel is
ON.
Can only debug in
custom program,
Decrease SWDEC Off ON/OFF Select it and the
indicator on panel is
ON.
2.14.3 Flag
Table 2-51 Flag List

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

1=function block in OOS status,
0 OOS
0= function block not in OOS status.
1= function block in IMAN status,
1 IMAN
0= function block not in IMAN status.
1= function block in MAN status,
2 MAN
0= function block not in MAN status.
1= function block in OS status,
3 OS
0= function block not in OS status.
1= function block in AUTO status,
4 AUTO
0= function block not in AUTO status.
1= function block in TR status,
5 TR
0= function block not in TR status.
1:generate PV HH Limit Alarm
8 PVHH
0:not generate PV HH Limit Alarm
1:generate PV LL Limit Alarm
9 PVLL
0:not generate PV LL Limit Alarm
1:generate PV H Limit Alarm
10 PVH
0:not generate PV H Limit Alarm
1:generate PV L Limit Alarm
11 PVL
0:not generate PV L Limit Alarm
1:generate SV H Limit Alarm
12 SVH
0:not generate SV H Limit Alarm
1:generate SV L Limit Alarm
13 SVL
0:not generate SV L Limit Alarm
1:generate MVH Alarm
14 MVH
0:not generate MV H Alarm
1:generate MV L Alarm
15 MVL
0:not generate MV L Alarm
1:generate alarm for range high/low
limit reversal
18 REVSCL
0:not generate alarm for range high/low
limit reversal
1:generate CFGERR Alarm
19 CFGERR
0:not generate CFGERR Alarm

223
 Function Block Reference

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

1:generate MV Velocity H Limit
Alarm(DMVH)
22 DMVH
0:not generate MV Velocity H Limit
Alarm(DMVH)
1:generate MV Velocity L Limit
Alarm(DMVL)
23 DMVL
0:not generate MV Velocity L Limit
Alarm(DMVL)
1:AOF=ON
25 AOF
0:AOF=OFF
Else Undefined

2.14.4 Example

Adjust the temperature 11_44TE21A to achieve the temperature automatic control, and can be
shown and operated in graphics.

Single loop (simple control system), refers to a closed loop feedback control system consisted of a
controlled object, a detection transducer, a controller and a performer. It is often applied in
occasion with short delay time for controlled object, not a lot changes for load anf inteference, and
not high requirements for control quality.

Detail program is shown in Figure 2-49, in which applies PID control function block and handheld
function block. Operation node interface can achieve monitoring and control of loop in graphics via
calling handheld function block tag.

Figure 2-49 Single loop program with handheld

Instruction for function block and example is shown below:

Table 2-52 Instruction of function block and example

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

224
 Function Block Reference

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

001 11_44TCV03_PID Function block tag PID function block tag PID

002 11_44TCV03_OP Function block tag Handheld function block tag MANUAL_EP

003 11_44TCV03M AO output Level regulating valve

004 11_44TE21A AI input Level detect signal

Parameter settings of PID function block:

PSWAM: ON

Set program internal/external set control as ON

SWPN: set according to the feature settings of controlled object

MAN_OPT: ON

SV_OPT: ON

PID_OPT: 1

SVTR_OPT: ON

MODE_OPT: ON

MVSCL, MVSCH, MVEU: same unit with PV range.

SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: same unit with PV range.

DL (deviation alarm value of PV and SV) is set as 10％ of controlled object range.

MVH, MVL: same settings with performer range.

SVL, SVH: same with PV range if SV limit function is not required.

DMVLIM: 5

DB: 0.5％ of controlled object range.

MODE_OP=OFF

BKIN should connect BKOUT of handheld function block，BKINERR should connect BKOUTERR
of handheld function block.

Parameter settings of handheld function block:

225
 Function Block Reference

MVSCL, MVSCH: same with performer range.

SVSCL, SVSCH: same with PV range.

MVH, MVL: same settings with performer range.

SVL, SVH: same with PV range if SV limit function is not required.

DMVLIM: 2

Alarm settings

 Positive deviation alarm

 Negative deviation alarm

Note:

Control panel can call function block name from HMI directly.

2.15 Maximum Selection Function Block (ASH)

ASH function block can implement the input selection of the first channel, when value of the
second channel is larger than that of the first, the output switches to the second channel and alarm
is generated. It will not be switched to first channel until the value of the first channel is larger than
that of the second, meanwhile the alarm is eliminated.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 90μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.15.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-53 Parameter instruction and application of ASH Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Range The same as the
Input Range Configuration
Parameters Settings INSCH － actual value of IN
H Parameter
H

226
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
The same as the
Configuration
INSCL Input Range L － actual value of IN
Parameter
L
The same as the
Output Range Configuration
OUTSCH － actual value of
H Parameter
OUT H
The same as the
Output Range Configuration
OUTSCL － actual value of
L Parameter
OUT L
Set in the function
IN actual Configuration
INEU － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
OUT actual Configuration
OUTEU － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Used for data
Input displayed on
Configuration
INDLEN decimal digits － function block
Parameter
[0,5] panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
Output displayed on
OUTDLE Configuration
decimal digits － function block
N Parameter
[0,5] panel (equal to 3
as default).
Contact to AI tag
Refer to Note1, 2
Extended Control the output
Parameters IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin and has the overall
switch function
from input range to
output range
Connect to
measuring point
ALM1 Input 1Alarm － Input Pin
AI.ERR
Note1, 2
Refer to
Contact to AI tag
Note1, 2
Refer to
Control the output
Input Pin IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin and has the overall
switch function
from input range to
output range
Connect to
measuring point
ALM2 Input 2Alarm － Input Pin
AI.ERR
Refer to Note1, 2
Connect to
Feedback
BKIN － Input Pin BKOUT of
input
downstream block
Connect to
Feedback BKOUT of
BKINERR － Input Pin
status input downstream block
ERR
Connect to electric
Output Pin OUT Output value － Output Pin manual instrument
Refer to Note2

227
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to the
BKIN of Upstream
Feedback
BKOUT － Output Pin Block, Related
output value
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUTE Feedback
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
RR status value
Upstream Block
Balance switch is
used when the
output selection
source changed,
and performs
Balance Operation
TFLT TRUE smooth transition
switch time (s) Parameter
for the output
value. When
Advance TFLT=0.0, the
Settings balance is
disabled.
Safety mode
selection
(OFF=
SAFE_OP Configuration Note3
ordinary － Refer to
T Parameter
mode, ON=
advanced
mode)
Display the
Input 1 Monitoring
SEL1 － currently selected
selected Parameter
signal1
Display the
Input 2 Monitoring
SEL2 － currently selected
selected Parameter
signal2
Input 1 bad Monitoring Display the signal
ERR1 －
quality Parameter quality1
Input 2 bad Monitoring Display the signal
ERR2 －
quality Parameter quality2
Status
Monitoring
ERR Module fault －
Parameter
Note1
Refer to
Override Monitoring
OVERIDE － “Override Alarm”
Alarm Parameter Note4

MV holds the
current output
value, ON= Monitoring Connect to
HOLD －
hold the Parameter upstream output,
current output
value
Suppress
module alarm. Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Alarm On=prohibit to Parameter
Enabled and display alarm.
Suppress Alarm
ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Parameter
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6

228
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
OOS mode Set as ON at the
OOS setting switch Operation first time of
SWOOS TRUE
Settings (ON= OOS Parameter function block
mode) downloading

Note 1. Maximum Selection Output

When input ALM1=OFF and ALM2=OFF:

If IN1≧IN2, then OUT=IN1 and OVERRIDE=OFF;

If IN1<IN2, then OUT=IN2 and OVERRIDE=ON, until IN1≧IN2, alarm OVERRIDE=OFF and
OUT=IN1.

Note 2. Input Alarm

When IN1 is selected, if ALM1=ON, then ERR1=ON, OUT is maintained, and BKOUTERR=ON, it
will not be switched to output IN2 even if IN1<IN2.

When IN1 is selected, if ALM2=ON, then ERR2=ON, OUT and BKOUTERR will depend on the
selection of security mode.

When IN2 is selected, if ALM2=ON, then ERR2=ON, OUT is maintained, and BKOUTERR=ON, it
will not be switched to output IN1 even if IN1≧IN2.

When IN2 is selected, if ALM1=ON, then ERR1=ON, OUT and BKOUTERR will depend on the
selection of security mode

Note 3. Security Mode

When SAFE_OPT=OFF, if one input channel (IN1) is selected while the other input channel (IN2)
generates alarm (ALMn), the current selected channel (IN1) will be still selected and
BKOUTERR=OFF.

When SAFE_OPT=ON, if one channel used to output while the other generates input alarm
(ALMn), the output will be maintained and BKOUTERR=ON.

229
 Function Block Reference

2.15.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-54 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Panel
Initial
Name Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Value
Name

Selected and the input

Alarm Input 1
Preference alarm is enabled
Enable Quality ALM1 － ON/OFF
Related parameter:
Alarm
ALM1

230
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Initial
Name Parameter Value Range Application Instruction
Value
Name

Selected and the input

Input 2
alarm is enabled
Quality ALM2 － ON/OFF
Related parameter:
Alarm
ALM2

Balance Time
Switch Time Coefficient TFLT 1.000 － －
(s) (TFLT)
2.15.3 Flag
Table 2-55 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Hold
D1 IN1
D2 IN2
D3 IN3
D4 High Selection
D5 Medium Selection
D6 Low Selection
D7 Override Alarm
D8 Disabled
D9 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D10 Selection 1
D11 Selection 2
D12 Selection 3
D13 IN1 Quality is Bad
D14 IN2 Quality is Bad
D15 IN3 Quality is Bad
D16 Suppression 1
D17 Suppression 2
D18 Suppression 3
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D20 Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D21 Manual (MAN)
D22 Automatic (AUTO)
D23 Error

231
 Function Block Reference

2.16 Minimum Selection Function Block (ASL)

ASL function block can implement the input selection of the first channel, when value of the
second channel is smaller than that of the first, the output switches to the second channel and
alarm is generated. It will not be switched to first channel until the value of the first channel is
smaller than that of the second, meanwhile the alarm is eliminated.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 90μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.16.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-56 Parameter instruction and application of ASL Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as

Configuration
Parameters Settings INSCH Input Range H － the actual value
Parameter
of IN H
The same as
Configuration
INSCL Input Range L － the actual value
Parameter
of IN H
The same as
OUTSC Output Range Configuration
－ the actual value
H H Parameter
of OUT H
The same as
OUTSC Output Range Configuration
－ the actual value
L L Parameter
of OUT L
Set in the
function block
Configuration
INEU Input unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Set in the
function block
Configuration
OUTEU Output unit － properties
Parameter
settings
interface.
Used for data
displayed on
Input decimal Configuration
INDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).

232
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Used for data
displayed on
OUTDL Output decimal Configuration
－ function block
EN digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to
3 as default).
Contact to AI
tag
Refer to Note1,
Note2

Extended Control the

Parameters IN1 Input 1 － Input Pin output and has
the overall
switch function
from input
range to output
range
Connect to
measuring point
ALM1 Input 1Alarm － Input Pin AI.ERR
Note1,
Refer to
Note2

Contact to AI
tag
Note1, 2
Refer to
Input Pin Control the
output and has
IN2 Input 2 － Input Pin
the overall
switch function
from input
range to output
range
Connect to
measuring point
ALM2 Input 2Alarm － Input Pin
AI.ERR
Refer to note1, 2
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN Feedback input － Input Pin
downstream
block
Connect to
BKINER Feedback BKOUT of
－ Input Pin
R status input downstream
block ERR
Connect to
electric manual
OUT Output Value － Output Pin
instrument
Refer to Note2
Connect to the
Output BKIN of
Pin Feedback Upstream
BKOUT － Output Pin
output value Block, Related
parameter:
BK_OPT
Connect to the
BKOUT Feedback
－ Output Pin BKINERR of
ERR status value
Upstream Block

233
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Balance switch
is used when
the output
selection source
changed, and
performs
Balance switch Operation
TFLT TRUE smooth
time (s) Parameter
transition for the
output value.
AdvanceS
When
ettings
TFLT=0.0, the
balance is
disabled.
Safety mode
selection
SAFE_O (OFF= ordinary Configuration Note3
－ Refer to
PT mode, ON= Parameter
advanced
mode)
Display the
Input 1 Monitoring
SEL1 － currently
selected Parameter
selected signal1
Display the
Input 2 Monitoring
SEL2 － currently
selected Parameter
selected signal2
Input 1 bad Monitoring Display the
ERR1 －
quality Parameter signal quality1
Input 2 bad Monitoring Display the
ERR2 －
quality Parameter signal quality2
Monitoring
ERR Module fault －
Status Parameter
Refer to high
select function
Note1
block
OVERID Monitoring
Override Alarm － “Override
E Parameter
Alarm”
Refer to 2.14.1
Note4

Connect the
upstream output
Monitoring
HOLD Hold Status － Enable when in
Parameter
automatic or
cascade mode
Alarm Suppress Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enable module alarm, Parameter
and ENALM Alarm enable TRUE Alarm Parameter Refer to 2.1.6
Suppress
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
Function block Set as ON at
OOS disabled Operation the first time of
SWOOS TRUE
Settings (ON=prohibited Parameter function block
) downloading

Note 1. Minimum Selection Output

When input ALM1=OFF and ALM2=OFF:

234
 Function Block Reference

If IN1≦IN2, then OUT=IN1 and OVERRIDE=OFF;

If IN1>IN2, then OUT=IN2 and OVERRIDE=ON, until back to IN1≦IN2, alarm OVERRIDE=OFF
and OUT=IN1

Note 2. Input Alarm

When OUT=IN1, if ALM1=ON, then ERR1=ON, OUT is maintained, and BKOUTERR=ON, it will
not be switched to output IN2 even if IN1>IN2.

When OUT=IN1, if ALM2=ON, then ERR2=ON, OUT and BKOUTERR will depend on the
selection of security mode.

When OUT=IN2, if ALM2=ON, then ERR2=ON, OUT is maintained, and BKOUTERR=ON, it will
not be switched to output IN1 even if IN1≦IN2.

When OUT=IN2, if ALM1=ON, then ERR1=ON, OUT and BKOUTERR will depend on the
selection of security mod

Note 3. Selection of Security Mode

When SAFE_OPT=OFF, if one channel used to output while the other generates input alarm
(ALMn), the current output channel will be maintained and BKOUTERR=OFF.

When SAFE_OPT=ON, if one channel used to output while the other generates input alarm
(ALMn), and the output is maintained will be maintained and BKOUTERR=ON.

235
 Function Block Reference

2.16.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-57 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Function
Block Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Value Range
Parameter Value Instruction
Name
Selected and the
Preference Alarm input alarm is
Input 1 Quality
Enable ALM1 － ON/OFF enabled
Alarm
Related parameter:
ALM1

236
 Function Block Reference

Function
Block Initial Application
Panel Parameter Name Value Range
Parameter Value Instruction
Name
Selected and the
input alarm is
Input 2 Quality
ALM2 － ON/OFF enabled
Alarm
Related parameter:
ALM2
Balance Time
Switch Coefficient TFLT 1.000 － －
Time (TFLT)
2.16.3 Flag
Table 2-58 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Hold
D1 IN1
D2 IN2
D3 IN3
D4 High Selection
D5 Medium Selection
D6 Low Selection
D7 Override Alarm
D8 Disabled
D9 Manual Initialize (IMAN)
D10 Selection 1
D11 Selection 2
D12 Selection 3
D13 IN1 QUALITY IS BAD
D14 IN2 Quality is Bad
D15 IN3 Quality is Bad
D16 Suppression 1
D17 Suppression 2
D18 Suppression 3
D19 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D20 Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D21 Manual (MAN)
D22 Automatic (AUTO)
D23 Error

2.16.4 Application Example

To achieve the filed-valve adjustment and control as shown in Figure 2-50, two PV detects on the

237
 Function Block Reference

loop are LT_3037 and TE_3071. To achieve low select control of loop control, and it can be
operated in flow chart.

Override control is a select control. When in normal working condition, control output will not
overlimit, and can output it directly; when in abnormal working condition, output will exceeds limit,
and the utmost limit method should be applied and select safe control output.

Override control often consists of low select override and high select override. Take two-loop low
select override control as an example.

Figure 2-50 One DI One DO Valve Diagram

Details of program are shown in below.

Figure 2-51 Low Select Override Control

Instructions of function block and example are shown below.

Table 2-59 Instructions of Function Block and Example

No. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 TE_3071 AI Input PV of PID1

002 LT_3073 AI Input PV of PID2

238
 Function Block Reference

No. Example Type Instruction Remark

003 TV_3071 AO Output Control Target

004 TIC3071 Function Block Tag PID1 Function Block Tag

005 LIC3073 Function Block Tag PID2 Function Block Tag

Low Select Override
006 TIC3071ASL Function Block Tag
Function Block
Hand Control Function
007 TIC30701MAN Function Block Tag
Block

Parameter settings of PID:

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: the same as its input PV range unit.

 SVL, SVH: when SV amplitude is not needed, it should be same with SV range.

Parameter settings of ASL:

 Low select override control ASL has range switch function, while in this example, both its
input and output correspond to valve opening, and the units of IN and OUT are set as
0~100%.

 INSCL=0

 INSCH=100

 OUTSCL=0

 OUTSCH=0

Alarm parameter settings:

 When PID inputting PV fault occurs, its PID loop enters into PVERR mode, and the loop
switches to manual status automatically, PID outputting MV keeps.
 When low select override function block ASL select IN2 as output, override alarm will
generate.

 PID function block inputs PV secondary H/L alarm when it is required.

The BKIN of input parameter in upstream function block basic parameter should connect with the
BKOUT of its downstream function block. BKINERR should connect with the BKOUTERR of its
downstream function block. The downsteam function block of PID is ASL. The downsteam function
block of ASL is handheld. The downsteam function block of handheld is AO tag.

Note:

Two-loop High Select Override Control

Two-loop high select override control replaces the low select ASL in two-loop low select override
control diagram to high select ASH, as shown below.

239
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-52 Two-loop High Select Override Control

Control panel can invoke the function block name in HMI directly.

2.17 Signal Distribution Function Block (FOUT)

It is mainly used for a master loop to distribute output signal to several slave loops. When the first
salve loop is in cascade mode, it will be processed at first, otherwise, process other salve loops.

It is a complex function block and its running time is 50μs.

Please refer to the 0 and 2.1 before using the function block.

2.17.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 2-60 Parameter instruction and application of FOUT Function Block

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

240
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Range The same as MV1

Configuration
Parameters Settings MVSCH1 MV1 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV1
Configuration
MVSCL1 MV1 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV2
Configuration
MVSCH2 MV2 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV2
Configuration
MVSCL2 MV2 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV3
Configuration
MVSCH3 MV3 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV3
Configuration
MVSCL3 MV3 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV4
Configuration
MVSCH4 MV4 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV4
Configuration
MVSCL4 MV4 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV5
Configuration
MVSCH5 MV5 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV5
Configuration
MVSCL5 MV5 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV6
Configuration
MVSCH6 MV6 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV6
Configuration
MVSCL6 MV6 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV7
Configuration
MVSCH7 MV7 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV7
Configuration
MVSCL7 MV7 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV8
Configuration
MVSCH8 MV8 high value － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as MV8
Configuration
MVSCL8 MV8 low value － actual value L
Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuration
SVSCH SV high scale － actual value H
Parameter
limit.
The same as PV
Configuration
SVSCL SV low scale － actual value L
Parameter
limit.

241
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Set in the function
Configuration
SVEU SV engineer unit － block properties
Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV1 actual Configuration
MVEU1 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV2 actual Configuration
MVEU2 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV3 actual Configuration
MVEU3 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV4 actual Configuration
MVEU4 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV5 actual Configuration
MVEU5 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV6 actual Configuration
MVEU6 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV7 actual Configuration
MVEU7 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Set in the function
MV8 actual Configuration
MVEU8 － block properties
value unit Parameter
settings interface.
Used for data
displayed on
SV decimal Configuration
SVDLEN － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV1 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN1 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV2 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN2 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV3 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN3 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV4 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN4 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).

242
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Used for data
displayed on
MV5 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN5 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV6 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN6 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV7 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN7 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Used for data
displayed on
MV8 decimal Configuration
MVDLEN8 － function block
digits [0,5] Parameter
panel (equal to 3
as default).
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
Direct/Rev OFF=Direct
the increasing of
erse Switch Operation action,
SWPN1 PV in direct TRUE
Settings Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN2 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN3 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.

243
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN4 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN5 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN6 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN7 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Direct/Reverse
switch. SV is not
changed, the MV
increases with
OFF=Direct
the increasing of
Operation action,
SWPN8 PV in direct TRUE
Parameter ON=Reverse
action, and
action
decreases with
the increasing of
PV in reverse
action.
Extended Connect to outer
Input Pin CSV Cascade － Input Pin loop control value
Parameters
MV

244
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN1 Feedback input1 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR1 － Input Pin
input1 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN2 Feedback input2 － Input Pin
downstream block,
Refer to Note1
Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR2 － Input Pin
input2 downstream block
Note1
ERR, Refer to
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN3 Feedback input3 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR3 － Input Pin
input3 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN4 Feedback input4 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR4 － Input Pin
input4 downstream block
Note1
ERR, Refer to
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN5 Feedback input5 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR5 － Input Pin
input5 downstream block
Note1
ERR, Refer to
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN6 Feedback input6 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR6 － Input Pin
input6 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1

245
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN7 Feedback input7 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR7 － Input Pin
input7 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1
Connect to
BKOUT of
BKIN8 Feedback input8 － Input Pin downstream
block , Refer to
Note1

Connect to
Feedback status BKOUT of
BKINERR8 － Input Pin
input8 downstream block
ERR, Refer to Note1
PID operation
MV1 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 1
PID operation
MV2 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 2
PID operation
MV3 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 3
PID operation
MV4 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 4
PID operation
MV5 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 5
PID operation
MV6 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 6
Output Pin PID operation
MV7 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 7
PID operation
MV8 － Output Pin Downstream CSV
output value 8
Connect to the
BKIN of Upstream
Feedback output Block, Related
BKOUT － Output Pin
value parameter:
BK_OPT
Refer to Note1
Connect to the
BKOUTER Feedback status BKINERR of
－ Output Pin
R value Upstream Block
Refer to Note1
SV for loop Operation
SV SV TRUE Refer to 2.1.3
closed control Parameter
Suppress
Alarm module alarm, Operation
AOF TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enable and On=prohibit to Parameter
Suppress display alarm.
FLAG Flag － Output Pin Refer to 2.1.6
OOS mode Set as ON at the
OOS setting switch Operation first time of
SWOOS TRUE
Settings (ON= OOS Parameter function block
mode) downloading

246
 Function Block Reference

Note . Basic function

BKINn and BKINERRn connect the corresponding BKOUT, BKOUTERR of the nth downstream
salve loop.

BKOUT, BKOUTERR connect the corresponding BKIN, BKINERR of upstream master loop.

It is mainly used in cascade control of a master loop distributing output to several salve loops.

When the amount of cascade modes of salve loops is greater than 0, the salve loop newly added
to the cascade mode will receive the cascade output of master loop directly, which means the set
value input jumping.

When the amount of cascade modes of salve loops is 0, the salve loop newly added to the
cascade mode will have the function of bumpless transfer, which means the set value is bumpless.
If switched in at the same time, the one with the lower order is prior.

247
 Function Block Reference

2.17.2 Function Block Panel Parameter

Table 2-61 Operation Instruction for Panel Parameter

Panel
Application
Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name

PID Operation Output Read-only,

Value % MV1 MV1 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 1
Read-only,
MV2 MV2 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 2

248
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only,
MV3 MV3 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 3
Read-only,
MV4 MV4 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 4
Read-only,
MV5 MV5 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 5
Read-only,
MV6 MV6 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 6
Read-only,
MV7 MV7 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 7
Read-only,
MV8 MV8 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] Operation
output value 8
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH1 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 1 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL1 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH2 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 2 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL2 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Range1 Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH3 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 3 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL3 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH4 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 4 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL4 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
Range2 H Limit MVSCH5 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 5 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL5 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH6 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 6 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL6 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV

249
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH7 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 7 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL7 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
Read-only, H
H Limit MVSCH8 100.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
Output 8 loop MV
Scale Read-only, L
L Limit MVSCL8 0.000 [MVSCL,MVSCH] value setting of
loop MV
D/R Selecting direct
Direct Action
Action SWPN1 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 1
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN1 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN2 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 2
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN2 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN3 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 3
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN3 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN4 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 4
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN4 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN5 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 5
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN5 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN6 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 6
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN6 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN7 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 7
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN7 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.

250
 Function Block Reference

Panel
Application
Name Parameter Initial Value Value Range
Instruction
Name
Selecting direct
Direct Action
SWPN8 √ ON/OFF action is
(selected)
enabled.
Output 8
Reverse Selecting
Action SWPN8 － ON/OFF reverse action
(selected) is enabled.
2.17.3 Flag
Table 2-62 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D25 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

2.17.4 Application Example

To control the water level, as shown below, the rotation speeds of two pumps should be same to
avoid back flow for the output header pipe caused by the different rotation speeds. And the two
pumps can be switched between same rotation setting mode and separately setting mode, and it
can be shown and operated in the diagram.

Figure 2-53 Diagram of single AI and double AO adjusting control

The single AI and double AO adjusting control means that the one PID loop controls 2 adjusting
valves or handhelds at the same time. It is often applied when 2 adjusting valves or handhelds are
required synchronized actions.

Its programming, which is shown in the figure below, can be achieved by applying function blocks
such as PIDEX, FOUT and MANUAL, etc. And the data display and operation of the host computer
interface can be achieved by the tags of function blocks.

251
 Function Block Reference

Figure 2-54 Programming of reactor water level control

The function block instruction and examples are shown in below.

Table 2-63 Function Block Instruction and Examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 LT_201 AI (Input) PV

002 VI_303AP AI (Input) Handheld Feedback1

003 VI_303BP AI (Input) Handheld Feedback2

004 SC_303AP AO (Output) Frequency Conversion1

005 SC_303AP AO (Output) Frequency Conversion 2

Tag of Function
006 LIC_201 Block
Tag of PID

Tag of Function Tag of Signal Distribution

007 SIC_303P
Block Function Block
Tag of Function Tag of Handheld1 Function
008 SIC_303AP
Block Block
Tag of Function Tag of Handheld2 Function
009 SIC_303BP
Block Block

Setting the parameters of PIDEX.

 SVSCL, SVSCH, SVEU: the same as the input PV range unit (0~600KPa)

 The ranges of SVL and SVH should be the same as SV when the SV limit function is not
required.

 MVSCL, MVSCL, MVEU: use the default value 0~100%

 MVL, MVH: are set in 0~100 when the MV output limit function is not required

 Parameter setting of FOUT: no setting

 Parameter setting of MANUAL:PVSCL, PVSCH, PVEU, MVSCL, MVSCH, MVEU:

0~100%

 Alarm Setting: SWPWF=ON

Notice:

The signal distribution function is mainly applied for distributing the setting output of a major loop

252
 Function Block Reference

to various minor loops of the downstream.

253
 Function Block Reference

Section 3 Logical Control Function Block Library

There are thirteen complex function blocks and seven simple function blocks in logical control
function block library. Panel parameters of complex function blocks can be operated in real-time
supervision software.

3.1 Software Pulse Sequence Output Function Block (SPO)

SPO function block switch the digital input signal to pulse output signal. The output pulse is
controlled by the input signal and pulse select time. When the lasting time of input signal is less or
equals to the change time of designated pulse width, output the first pulse. Otherwise, output the
second pulse.

SPO function block is simple function block, and its runtime is 12µs.

Table 3-1 Software Pulse Sequence Output Function Block Parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Digital input signal.
IN and TPLS work
together to control
the output signal, Connected to
Input pin IN － Input pin
which is one of the digital signal.
two pulse signal with
same cycle and
different pulse width.
Output cycle pulse
Output pin OUT － Output pin －
signal.
Pulse cycle (in
Set in the
second). The cycle Operation
Basic TPLS TRUE parameter
is related to the parameter
Parameters Properties.
cycle of program.
Pulse select time (in
second). The Set in the
Operation
TSW interval of the two TRUE parameter
Operation parameter
output signal is Properties.
parameter decided by TSW.
Set in the
Pulse width for first Operation
TPW1 TRUE parameter
pulse (in second). parameter
Properties.
Pulse width for Set in the
Operation
TPW2 second pulse (in TRUE parameter
parameter
second). Properties.

254
 Function Block Reference

The output pulse is controlled by the input signal and pulse select time, the relation between of
output signal and input signal is described following.

 When IN=ON, and the lasting time of input signal is less or equals to the choosing time of
pulse, the output width is TPW1.

 When IN=ON, and the lasting time of input signal is greater then the choosing time of
pulse, the output width is TPW2.

 When IN=OFF, stop pulse outputting and OUT=OFF.

 When the pulse choosing time equals to 0, the width of output pulse is TPW1, TPW2
does not work.

 When TPW1, TPW2 and TPW ARE LESS THAN 0, force TPW1=1, TPW2=0 and
TPW=0.

 When TPW1 and TPW2 are more then TPLS, TPW1 and TPW2 equal to TPLS.

 When TPLS are more than 0, but less than the period of current program, TPLS equals
to the period of current program.

The timing sequence figures of output signal are shown as follow, please refer to Figure 3-1 to
Figure3-4, and the “n” in the figure is a nature number.

Figure 3-1 TPW2>TPW1 and (TSW-TPLS×n)>TPW2

Figure 3-2 TPW2>TPW1 and (TWS-TPLS×n)<TPW2

255
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-3 TPW2>TPW1 and (TSW-TPLS×n)<TPW2

Figure3-4 Timing sequence figure when TPW2<TPW1

3.2 Digital Status Change Function Block (DSCA)

DSCA function block can count the status change times of input digital. It can count positive jump,
negative jump or both of input digital by the setting of statistic mode “MODE”.

DSCA function block is simple function block, and its running time is 4µs. The parameters of DSCA
function block is described in Digital Status C.

3.2.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-2 Digital Status Change Function Block Parameter Instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN Switch Input － Input pin －
Parameters
Switch for
Statistics
input pin STARTUP Start/Stop: － Input pin －
OFF=Stop,
ON=Start
Reset Signal:
RST － Input pin －
ON=Reset

256
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output for Change
Time. Detail
output
OUT description of － Output pin －
pin
OUT is shown
below this table.
Statistics Mode:
0=Amount of
configur Positive Hopping, Set in the
ation 1=Amount of configuration configuration
MODE －
paramet Negative Hopping, parameter Properties.
er 2=Amount of
Positive
Hopping/Negative
3.2.2 Application Example

To count the ON/OFF times of the field electromagnetic valve, and display on the diagram, as
shown in below.

Figure 3-5 Diagram of counting valve status modification

The digital signals are “1” and “0”. In application, the statistics such as counting and accumulation
should be performed for the digital change times. It is often used for counting the ON/OFF times of
field valve and electric machine.

Its programming is shown below and can be achieved via DSCA. The statistics data of the host
computer displayed data can be monitored via custom tag.

Figure 3-6 Programming of valve ON/OFF status statistics

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 3-3 Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 BOOL_IN DI (Input) Tag of DI

002 BOOL_RST Custom BOOL Tag of Reset

257
 Function Block Reference

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

For Accumulation
003 BOOL_STA Custom UDINT Custom Tag
Display

Setting parameters of DSCA:

 STARTUP: ON

 MODE: 2

Setting parameters of TP:

 DT: 1

 No alarm setting

3.3 Switch Status Time Accumulation Function Block (SSTA)

SSTA function block accelerates the time when the digital status is ON or OFF. Statistic mode
MODE sets to accelerate which status and the output acceleration time can be set in 4 formats:
second, minute, hour and day.

SSTA function block is simple function block, and its running time is 11µs.

3.3.1 Parameter Instruction

The parameters of SSTA function block is described in Switch status TI.

Table 3-4 Switch status time accumulation function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic IN Switch Input － Input pin －
Parameters
Start/Stop Switch
for Accumulation:
STARTUP － Input pin －
ON=Start,
input pin OFF=Stop
Valid while
Reset Signal: Positive
RST － Input pin
ON=Reset transition-sen
sing
Accumulative
Time Output.
output pin OUT Detail description － Output pin －
of OUT is shown
below this table.

258
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
operation Set in the
Accumulation operation
paramete INITVAL TRUE function block
Initial Value parameter
r Properties.
Select Switch for
Accumulation
Mode
configurat
Mode=[0~3], On Set in the
ion configuration
MODE Status Time － parameter
paramete parameter
Accumulation Properties.
r
Mode=[4~7], Off
Status Time
Accumulation

Description of OUT:

 When STARTUP=ON, output the change time of input digital status.

 When STARTUP=OFF, this function block stop to statistics. And the OUT will keep the
statistics of the last week.

 When RST changing from OFF to ON, the OUT will be equal to INITVAL and the inner
count of function block will be set as INITVAL.

 When the master controller cold startup, the OUT will be equal to INITVAL and STARTUP
will be OFF and the inner count of function block will be set as 0.

Choices of MODE:

When Start/Stop Switch for accumulation STARTUP=ON, start acceleration.

 MODE=0

Accelerate the time when the status is ON.

OUT=acceleration time of input ON (second as unit) + acceleration initial value

 MODE=1

Accelerate the time when the status is ON.

OUT=acceleration time of input ON (second as unit)/60+acceleration initial value

 MODE=2

Accelerate the time when the status is ON.

OUT=acceleration time of input ON (second as unit)/3600+acceleration initial value

 MODE=3

259
 Function Block Reference

Accelerate the time when the status is ON.

OUT=acceleration time of input ON (second as unit)/86400+acceleration initial value

 MODE=4

Accelerate the time when the status is OFF.

OUT=acceleration time of input OFF (second as unit)+acceleration initial value

 MODE=5

Accelerate the time when the status is OFF.

OUT=acceleration time of input OFF (second as unit)/60+acceleration initial value

 MODE=6

Accelerate the time when the status is OFF.

OUT=acceleration time of input OFF (second as unit)/3600+acceleration initial value

 MODE=7

Accelerate the time when the status is OFF.

OUT=acceleration time of input OFF (second as unit)/86400+acceleration initial value

3.3.2 Application Example

To count the running time of the field pump as shown below, and display in the flow chart. The
digital signals are 1 and 0. The switch status time should be accumulated, displayed and counted.

Figure 3-7 Diagram of pump running time display

Its programming is shown below and can be achieved via SSTA. The host computer interface can
display data and monitor the statistic data via custom tag.

260
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-8 Programming of valve switch status statistics

The function block instruction and examples are shown below.

Table 3-5 Function block instruction and examples

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

001 BOOL_IN DI (Input) Digital Input Tag

002 BOOL_RST Custom BOOL Reset Tag

003 ON_TIME Custom REAL Custom Tag For Time Display

Parameter settings of SSTA:

 STARTUP: ON

 MODE: 0

3.4 Eight Input QOR Function Block (QOR_8)

QOR-8 function block restricts or operates 8inout BOOL type variables. QOR_8 function block is
simple function block, and its running time is 6µs.

The parameters of QOR_8 function block is described in 8 input QOR function block.

3.4.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-6 8 input QOR function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic input pin IN1 Switch Input1 － Input pin －
Parameter
IN2 Switch Input2 － Input pin －

261
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
s IN3 Switch Input3 － Input pin －
IN4 Switch Input4 － Input pin －
IN5 Switch Input5 － Input pin －
IN6 Switch Input6 － Input pin －
IN7 Switch Input7 － Input pin －
IN8 Switch Input8 － Input pin －
Detail description
OUT of OUT is shown － Output pin －
output pin below this table.
Amount of ON
ONNUM － Output pin －
That Has Inputted.
Operation Mode:
configuration configuration
MODE ON=Greater and － －
parameter parameter
Equal; OFF=Equal
Set in the
operation Limit or Operation operation
NUM － function block
parameter Number. [0~8] parameter
Properties.

Description of OUT is:

 MODE=ON
When the number of function block variable ON is more than or equals to restricted or
operated number NUM, output is ON, otherwise, OFF.

 MODE=OFF
When the number of function block variable ON equals to restrict or operated number
NUM, output is ON, otherwise, OFF. ONNUM is the number of function block actual input
ON.

3.4.2 Application Example

To determine 8 DI, when there are 5 or more DI in status of ON, output is ON.

To determine the number of digital value, when the number of closed digital value is greater than
or equal to the set number, output (BOOL) is ON, or it is OFF.

Details of program are shown below, it applies QOR_8.

Figure 3-9 Program of Determine Digital Value Number

Instructions of function block and example are shown below.

262
 Function Block Reference

Table 3-7 Instructions of Function Block and Example

No. Example Type Instruction Remarks

001 BOOL_IN1~7 DI Input DI Tag 8 DI

002 BOOL_OUT Custom BOOL Output Tag

003 BOOL_NUM Custom UINT Custom Tag Number of Input ON

Parameter Settings of QOR_8:

 NUM: 5

 MODE: ON

Note: When MODE=ON, working mode is ”greater than or equal to”. When MODE=OFF, working
mode is ”equal to”.

3.5 Digital First SN Indicator Function Block (FIRST)

FIRST function block figures out the first digital serial number jumps from OFF to ON among 16
digital input. The priority of input signals is: when IN1 and IN2 jump from OFF to ON at the same
time, output the serial number of IN1.

QOR_8 function block is simple function block, and its running time is 12µs.

The parameters of QOR_8 function block is described in Table 3-8.

Table 3-8 Digital first SN indicator function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Input Pin IN1 Switch Input1 － Input pin －
Parameters
IN2 Switch Input2 － Input pin －
IN3 Switch Input3 － Input pin －
IN4 Switch Input4 － Input pin －
IN5 Switch Input5 － Input pin －
IN6 Switch Input6 － Input pin －
IN7 Switch Input7 － Input pin －

263
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
IN8 Switch Input8 － Input pin －
IN9 Switch Input9 － Input pin －
IN10 Switch Input10 － Input pin －
IN11 Switch Input11 － Input pin －
IN12 Switch Input12 － Input pin －
IN13 Switch Input13 － Input pin －
IN14 Switch Input14 － Input pin －
IN15 Switch Input15 － Input pin －
IN16 Switch Input16 － Input pin －
Output “Reset
Switch”
(ON=Reset
Switch).
Output restore
switch RST can
only restore
Valid while
output when the
RST － Input pin Positive
input is not ON,
transition-sensing
when RST jumps,
OUT=0, CI=OFF,
eliminate input
jump status in
interior records. (It
is thought there is
no input jump.)
“Hold” only
relates to
whether output
first out value
and whether
Hold (ON: pause generate first
generating first out alarm, but
HOLD out value, OFF: - Input pin not relates to
restore generating other output
first out value) parameters and
will not
influence the
output of
QOROUT, CI,
and PACKOUT.
Serial Number of
Output Input Switch
Pin OUT － Output pin －
Value Which First
from OFF To ON.
When the number
of input digital ON
Restriction and is more than
QOROUT output of the 16 － Output pin NUM, set
input digitals. QOROUT=ON,
otherwise,
QOROUT=OFF.

264
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Indication That
Input Switch
CI Value Hopping: － Output pin －
OFF=No Hopping,
ON=Hopping
PACKOUT is the
package output of
input signals, that
Package Inputs is, to compress 16
and Output It. The BOOL type input
PACKOUT data type of － Output pin signals to 16
PACKOUT is integer output.
UNIT. IN16 is the highest
and IN1 is the
lowest.

Operatio Number or Default Operation

NUM TRUE －
n ON, [0~16] Parameter
Paramet Module Alarm Operation
er AOF TRUE -
Shield Parameter
Alarm
Alarm ENALM Alarm Enable TRUE -
Parameter
Paramet
er Alarm
FLAG Flag - -
Parameter

Note:

 When the output digital does not change, output OUT=0, CI=OFF.

 When the output digital changes from OFF to ON, output OUT is the first digital serial
number that jumps from OFF to ON(1~16) and CI parameter ON. When there is no input
signal jumps in this period, but several inputs jump at the same time, output OUT is the
smallest serial number.

Table 3-9 Flag for FIRST

Flag Monitoring Value Instruction

D0 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppress (AOF)
First Out Alarm
D1 Disable
(FIRST_ON)
D2 Disable Input Jump Indication (CI)
D3 Disable Limit or Output (QOROUT)
D4-D7 - -

3.6 Blink Function Block (BLINK)

BLINK function block generates the output signals of pulse. When both input are ON, it blinks all
the time.

BLINK function block is simple function block, and its running time is 1µs.

265
 Function Block Reference

The parameters of BLINK function block is described in Table 3-10.

Table 3-10 Blink function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Input IN1 Switch Input1 － input pin －
pin IN2 Switch Input2 － input pin －

Basic Flash Output

Parameters When IN1=IN2=ON, output OFF
Outpu OU and ON statuses on tern. Each
－ output pin －
t pin T status maintains one running
period. Otherwise, output OUT
trace IN1 input value.

Its true value table is shown as follows:

Table 3-11 Blink function block input and output true value table

IN1 IN2 OUT

OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF
ON OFF ON
ON ON ON, OFF Blinking

3.7 Interval Control Function Block (DGAP)

DGAP function block and PID function block are different in control mode: PID function block
outputs a series signal to control the equipments like valve; DGAP function block outputs the
digital signal to control discrete equipments like switch valve.

This function block has two work modes. When MODE=OFF, the function block is in 2 modes and
2 statuses work mode; when MODE=ON, the function block is in 2 modes and 3 statuses work
mode. In addition, this function block supports functions like measuring value alarm, error alarm,
manual operation mode, hold mode and setting vale tracing measuring value.

DGAP function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

The parameters of DGAP function block is described in following table.

3.7.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-12 Parameter instruction of DGAP

266
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application

Input Range Configuration Equal to high limit
SVSCH －
High Limit Parameter of PV.
Input Range Configuration Equal to low limit
SVSCL －
Low Limit Parameter of PV.
Range Set in the
Parameters Engineering Configuration
EU － parameter
Basic Unit Parameter
Properties
Parameters
Display on panel
Decimal Digits Configuration
DLEN － of this function
[0,5] Parameter
block.
Operation
Set in the
Mode: Configuration
Work mode MODE － parameter
OFF=BISTATE, Parameter
Properties.
ON=TRISTATE
Extended Measured
PV － Input Pin Connect to AI,
Parameters Value
Input pins Connect to output
CSV Outer Set Point － Input Pin of upper function
block.
OUTINC Forward Output － Output Pin Digital Signal
OUTDEC Inverted Output － Output Pin Digital Signal
When function
block work in
cascade,
Feedback BKOUT=SV.
BKOUT － Output Pin
Output When function
Output pins block work in
non-cascade,
BKOUT=PV.
Function Block
ERR － Output Pin －
Alarm
Whether Connect to the
BKOUTE Function Block BKINERR of
－ Output Pin
RR Mode is upper function
Cascade Stage block.
Man/Auto
Switch: Operation
SWAM － －
On=Auto, Parameter
Off=Man
Optional Switch
for Setting
Value:
Operation Operation
SWSV ON=Outer － －
parameters Parameter
Setting Value,
OFF=Inner
Setting Value
Local Setting Operation
SV TRUE －
Value Parameter
Monitoring
EI Deviation － EI=PV-SV
Parameter
Alarm Input HH Limit Operation
PVHH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Setting Alarm Value Parameter
Input High Limit Operation
PVH TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Alarm Value Parameter

267
 Function Block Reference

PV L Alarm Operation
PVL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Value Parameter
PV LL Alarm Operation
PVLL TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Value Parameter
Positive Error Operation
DVH TRUE －
Alarm Limit Parameter
Negative
Operation
DVL Error Alarm TRUE －
Parameter
Limit
Error Alarm
Operation
DVHYS Hysteresis TRUE －
Parameter
Value
PV Alarm
Operation
PVHYS Hysteresis TRUE Refer to 2.1.2
Parameter
Value
Operation
GAP Gap Width TRUE －
Gap Parameter
Settings Gap Hysteresis Operation
GAPHYS TRUE －
Value Parameter
SV Track
Switch in
Manual Mode:
SWSVTR=ON,
Configuration
SV Track SWSVTR SV Tracks PV; － －
Parameter
SWSVTR
=OFF, SV
Does not Track
PV
Module Alarm
Suppress
Alarm Operation
AOF ON=Alarm TRUE Refer to 2.1.6
Enable Parameter
Display
Disabled

1. Function Block Logic Figure

268
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-10 function block logic figure

1) 2 positions and 2 statuses work mode

When MODE=OFF, the function block is in 2 positions and 2 statuses work mode. The function
block outputs OUTINC and OUTDEC statuses by comparing error EI (EI=SV - PV) and gap GAP
between set value SV and process value PV.

In automatically operation status:

When EI descends to the low limit of GAP in non-sensitive area, OUTINC=ON, OUTDEC=OFF.

When EI=GAP/2, OUTDEC keep the value of last week, and OUTINC=OFF.

When EI ascends to the high limit of GAP in non-sensitive area, OUTINC=OFF, OUTDEC=ON.

When EI=-GAP/2, OUTDEC=OFF and OUTDEC keep the value of last week.

When EI returns to non-sensitive area (-GAP/2< EI < GAP/2), OUTINC and OUTDEC maintains
the original values. That is, when EI ascends from the low limit of GAP in non-sensitive area to
non-sensitive area, OUTINC=ON, OUTDEC=OFF; when EI descends from the high limit of GAP in
non-sensitive area to non-sensitive area, OUTINC=OFF, OUTDEC=ON.

The input and output relationships of function block are shown as follows:

269
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-11 DGAP BISTATE operation mode

2) 2 positions and 3 statuses work mode

When MODE=ON, the function block is in 2 positions and 3 statuses work mode. The function
block outputs OUTINC and OUTDEC statuses by comparing error EI (EI = SV – PV) and gap GAP
between set value SV and process value PV, gap GAP and gap hysteresis GAPHYS.

In automatically operation status:

When error descends to EI< - (GAP/2+GAPHYS), OUTINC=ON, OUTDEC=OFF.

When EI=(GAP/2+GAPHYS), OUTDEC keep the value of last week and OUTINC=OFF.

When EI=-(GAP/2+GAPHYS), OUTDEC=OFF and OUTDEC keep the value of last week.

When error returns to GAP in non-sensitive area (EI>-GAP/2), OUTINC=OFF, OUTDEC=OFF.

The input and output relationships of function block are shown as follows:

270
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-12 DGAP TRISTATE operation mode

3) Error alarm

The function block set positive error limit alarm dvh, negative error limit alarm dvl and error alarm
hysteresis DVHYS.

Positive error limit alarm: when error EI is more than or equals to positive error limit dvh, in the flag,
set positive error limit alarm symbol.

When error is less than DVH-DVHYS, in the flag, eliminate positive error limited alarm symbol.

Negative error limit alarm; when error EI is less than or equals to -DVL, in the flag, set negative
error limit alarm symbol. When error is more than -(DVL-DVHYS), in he flag, eliminate negative
error limit alarm symbol.

2. range high and low limit reversal alarm

When the limit of set value SVSCH is less than or equals to SVSCL, limit threshold overturn alarm.

3. Alarm limit threshold overturn alarm

When PVHH -PVHYS <= PVH or PVH - PVHYS <= PVL + PVHYS or PVL - PVHYS <= PVLL,
alarm limit threshold overturn alarm.

4. Manual operation mode

In manual operation mode, function block does not operate switch control, and OUTINC and
OUTDEC can be set.

5. Feedback output value

271
 Function Block Reference

When the function block is under string mode, BKOUT equals to set value.

When the function block is under non-string mode, BKOUT equals to process value

3.7.2 Parameters Description of Panel

Table 3-13 Parameters Description of DGAP Panel

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial Value
Parameter Application Instruction
Name Value Range
Name
PV PV HH Alarm Value. When the PVHH
HH PVHH 100.000 －
Alarm alarm is selected, this is effective.

272
 Function Block Reference

Function Block
Panel Parameter Initial Value
Parameter Application Instruction
Name Value Range
Name
PV high Alarm Value. PV high Alarm
H PVH 90.000 － Value. When the PVH alarm is selected,
this is effective.
PV low Alarm Value. When the PV low
L PVL 10.000 －
alarm is selected, this is effective.
PV LL Alarm Value. When the PVLL
LL PVLL 0.000 －
alarm is selected, this is effective.
HYS PVHYS 0.000 － Hysteresis of PV alarm.
EI EI 0.000 － Read only, EI=PV-SV
When this is selected, the positive
PEI － 100.000 －
deviation is effective.
EI Alarm
When this is selected, the negative
NEI － 100.000 －
deviation is effective.
DVHYS DVHYS 0.000 － －
MODE=OFF, the function block work in
BISTATE MODE － －
Work BISTRATE mode.
Mode MODE=ON, the function block work in
TRISTATE MODE √ －
TRISTATE mode.
Track SWSVTR √ － SWSVTR=ON, then SV track PV.
SV Track
Settings SWSVTR=OFF, then SV will not track
Not Track SWSVTR － －
PV.
GAP GAP 20.000 － －
GAP
HYS GAPHYS 0.000 － －
OUTINC OUTINC － － positive output
Output
OUTDEC OUTDEC － － negative output
3.7.3 Flag
Table 3-14 Flag

Flag Instruction
D0 Disabled
D1 Manual (MAN)
D2 Automatic (AUTO)
D3 Cascade (CAS)
D4 PV HH Alarm (PVHH)
D5 PV High Limit Alarm (PVH)
D6 PV Low Limit Alarm (PVL)
D7 PV LL Alarm (PVLL)
D8 PEI Alarm (PEI)
D9 NEI alarm(NEI)
D10 Alarm for Range High/Low Limit Reversal (REVSCL)
D11 Alarm for Config Error (CFGERR)
D13 Alarm Suppression (AOF)

273
 Function Block Reference

Flag Instruction
D14 Error

3.8 Pulse Position Function Block (PULPOS)

PULPOS function block compares two analog input signals---set value and feedback value of
process parameter (process value) and output two BOOL type output according to the result.
When the process value is less than set value, generate positive output pulse; when it is more
than the set value, generate negative output pulse.

PULPOS function block is simple function block, and its running time is 16µs.

Table 3-15 Pulse position function block parameter instruction

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Basic Setting process value in
SV － Input Pin
Parameters Value REAL
Input Pin
Measured process value in
PV － Input Pin
Value REAL
Forward
OUTINC Pulse － Output Pin －
Output
Output Pin
Reverse
OUTDE
Pulse － Output Pin －
C
Output
Monitoring Monitoring
EI Deviation － EI=SV-PV
Parameter Parameter
Operation Forward Operation
FSR TRUE Unit in PV
Parameter Travel Rate Parameter
Reverse Operation
RSR TRUE Unit in PV
Travel Rate Parameter
Deviation Operation
DB TRUE Unit in PV
Deadband Parameter

274
 Function Block Reference

Name Description Upload Properties Application Reference

Output
Pulse
Cycle (Unit:
S).
When set
pulse
period
TCYC is
Operation
TCYC less than or TRUE
Parameter
equals to
pulse
width,
output
OUTINC in
pulse
period are
all ON.

3.8.1 Logic Time Sequencing

Figure 3-13 Logic Time Sequencing Figure

Each pulse period of function block outputs positive and negative pulse according to comparing
result of error and dead zone.

 When error EI is in the limit of dead zone [-DB, DB], there is no pulse output signal.

 When EI>DB, generate positive pulse.


 When EI<-DB, generate the negative pulse.

When setting FSR=0 and RSR=0, then interior system precision is 0.0000001.

275
 Function Block Reference

3.9 Motor Control Function Block (MOTOR)

MOTOR function block enables control and interlock protect to a single equipment by last level
sequence control command or operators by penal.

MOTOR function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

3.9.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-16 Motor control function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Basic Mode 0=Pulse, 1=Pulse Configurati
Parameters Setting OUTTYPE Sequence, 2=Long － on －
SignalNote2 Parameter
Configurati
SETTYPE Run ModeNote1 － on －
Parameter
Reverse Stop
Command Respond
Mode, valid in
manual mode and
When in manual
automatic mode.
and auto mode
0=In the process of
and lock mode,
operating output,
the system
system does not Configurati
responds to
REVTYPE respond to negative － on
input negative
stop command. Parameter
command and is
1=In the process of
irreverent to
operating output,
REVTYPE
system responds to
setting.
negative stop
command and
output stop
command.

276
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Whether to Confirm
Running Fault.
Set OPFLACK=OFF,
running fault does
not need to be
confirmed and is not
considered as
restricted condition
of new command
input.
Operation
OPFLACK Set OPFLACK=ON, TRUE －
Parameter
running fault needs
to be confirmed and
is considered as
restricted condition
of new command
input and is effective
to interlock
command and
manual/auto
command.
Whether
Auto-Remove
Running Fault.
Set AUTOCLR=ON,
running fault alarm
OPFL will be
eliminated
automatically after
Operation
AUTOCLR status feedback TRUE －
Parameter
signal is restored.
Set AUTOCLR=OFF,
running fault alarm
OPFL will be
eliminated only after
panel confirmation
after status feedback
signal is restored.
Whether To Confirm
Trip Fault.
Set TRIPACK=OFF,
TRIP will not need to
confirmed and be
used as restricted
condition of new Operation
TRIPACK TRUE －
command input. Parameter
Set TRIPACK=ON,
TRIP will need to
confirmed and used
as restricted
condition of new
command input.

277
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Shield Alarm When
Input Command.
Set IGNORALM
=ON, FAIL, TRIP,
FAULT and OPFL
will not be used as
restricted condition
of new command
input.
IGNORAL Operation
Set IGNORALM TRUE －
M Parameter
=OFF, FAIL, TRIP,
FAULT and OPFL
will be used as
restricted condition
of new command
input. And this is
valid only in
automatic and
manual mode.
Slight Feedback
When Output
Instruction.
Set IGNORSTA=ON,
current output does
not judge feedback
Operation
IGNORSTA status and DRIVE is TRUE －
Parameter
completely output.
Set
IGNORSTA=OFF,
current output
judges feedback
status.
Width of Output
Pulse (Unit: S)
Output pulse width.
Time When single pulse Operation
Settings TPW TRUE TPW<TOC
and pulse list are Parameter
output, define the
width of high level of
output pulse.
Equipment Travel
Time (Unit: S)
Equipment runtime.
When the command
is output and
corresponding
output feedback TPW and TPLS
Operation
TOC after TOC time, TRUE are associate
Parameter
operation fault OPFL parameters.
appears. (When
status feedback is
ignored,
IGNORSTA=ON,
operation fault does
not appear.)

278
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Output Pulse Cycle
(Unit: S)
Pulse period.
If TPLS<TPW,
Pulse period defined Operation
TPLS TRUE TPW=TPLS
when pulse list is Parameter
(TPLS<TOC)
output. When set
TPLS<TPW,
TPLS=TPW.
Setting Interval of
Operation
TWAIT Button Pop-Up (Unit: TRUE －
Parameter
S)
Extended Input Pin Run Status Measuring Point
RUNSTA － Input Pin
Parameters Feedback DI
Stop Status Measuring Point
STOPSTA － Input Pin
Feedback DI
Upstream
AUTRUN Auto-start Command － Input Pin
Output
Upstream
AUTSTOP Auto-stop Command － Input Pin
Output
Interlock Startup Upstream
EMRUN － Input Pin
Command Interlock Input
Interlock Stop Upstream
EMSTOP － Input Pin
Command Interlock Input
Upstream
PROTECT Protect － Input Pin
Output
On-site Control
Upstream
TOLOC Switch － Input Pin
Output
(ON=On-site)Note3
Program Input
Confirm Signal
Eliminate the Upstream
PACK － Input Pin
running alarm by Output
panel or program
input signal PACK.
Program Manual and
Upstream
PSWAM Auto Control Digital － Input Pin
Output
InputNote4
Start Command
Enable Signal
When RUNPRM
Upstream
RUNPRM =ON, interlock run, － Input Pin
Output
auto run and manual
run can output
startup command.
Stop Command
Enable Signal
When STOPRM
=ON, interlock stop, Upstream
STOPRM － Input Pin
auto stop and Output
manual stop can
output stop
command.
Select MAN/AUTO
Upstream
FBOPT Control Source － Input Pin
Output
(OFF=Panel)Note4

279
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Connect to
DI Electrical Fault
FAULT － Input Pin Measuring Point
Output (ON=Fault)
DI
Run Instruction
RUN － Output Pin Output DO
Output Output
Pin Stop Instruction
STOP － Output Pin Output DO
Output
Operation
SWFIX Fix Command － －
Parameter
MAN Startup Operation
MANRUN － －
Command Parameter
Operation MAN Stop Operation
Paramete MANSTOP － －
Command Parameter
r
MAN/AUTO witch:
Operation
SWAM ON=Auto, － －
Parameter
OFF=ManualNote4
Acknowledgement Operation
ACK － －
Signal Parameter
Equipment Fault
(ON=Fault) When
run status feedback
RUNSTA and stop
Monitoring
FAIL status feedback － －
Parameter
STOPSTA are both
ON, feedback fault
alarm FAIL will be
started.
Running Fault Monitoring
OPFL － －
(ON=Fault)Note5 Parameter
Trip Indication Monitoring
TRIP Note6 － －
(ON=Trip) Parameter
On-site Control Monitoring
LOC － －
Status Indication Parameter
Equipment Run
Monitoring
STARUN Status Indication － －
Parameter
(ON=Run)
Equipment Stop
Monitoring
STASTOP Status Indication － －
Parameter
(ON=Prohibited)
Equipment Mode Monitoring
MODE Note3 － －
(Observe) Parameter
Run Command
Monitoring
RUNFLAG Output Process － －
Parameter
(Observe)
Stop Command
STOPFLA Monitoring
Output Process － －
G Parameter
(Observe)
Alarm Suppress Module Operation
AOF TRUE －
Enabled Alarm Parameter
and
Suppress FLAG Flag Code － Output Pin －
OOS
In OOS Status Operation
SETTING SWOOS TRUE －
(ON=Prohibited) Parameter
S

280
 Function Block Reference

Note1: SETTYPE: run mode

1. 0=inching mode

 The output command will restore with input command.

 When status feedback is not ignored IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore outputs command
when corresponding status feedback reaches.

 When status feedback is ignored IGNORSTA=ON, the status feedback does not
influence the command output.

 1=consistent mode

 Input command jumps and checks and has memory. Output command will not restore
with input command.

 When status feedback is not ignored IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore outputs command
when corresponding status feedback reaches.

 When status feedback is ignored IGNORSTA=ON, the status feedback does not
influence the command output.

 2=lock mode

 Input command jumps and checks and has memory. Output command will not restore
with input command.

 Whether the status feedback is ignored or not, the status feedback does not influence
the command output.

When the system is not on the process of command output and there is no running fault, and the
feedback of RUNSTA and STOPSTA are OFF, start up power-failure alarm POWOFF.

Note2: OUTTYPE: output mode choice

Figure 3-14 pulse output mode (OUTTYPE =0)

281
 Function Block Reference

Figure 3-15 Pules list output mode (OUTTYPE = 1 )

Figure 3-16 Long signal output mode (OUTTYPE =2 )

Note3: Work Status

Function block mode and priority: OOS>on-site> close protection >interlock>manual /auto
selection

 OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to command output.
The output maintains.

 On-site(MODE=2)

When function block is not in OOS status and TOLOC=ON, function block is in on-site mode.
Output command restores and is not available. Function block is not restricted by switch.

 Close protection(MODE=3)

When function block is not in OOS status or on-site status, input close protection commands,
function block turns to close protection mode, output stop command. Close protection is not
restricted by switch or feedback signal or alarm.

When Input Pin PROTECT jumps from OFF to ON, trigger one stops command output.

 Interlock(interlock startup , interlock stop, MODE=4)

When function block is not in OOS status and on-site status, input interlock startup or interlock
stop command, function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive
transmission check.

282
 Function Block Reference

When both interlock startup, interlock stop commands are inputted, the system does not respond
to interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock startup command is inputted first and interlock stop command is inputted in
effective time of interlock startup command, execute interlock startup command first and then
interlock stop command after interlock startup command is inputted. And vise versa.

The validity of interlock command is restricted by start/stop enable (RUNPRM, STOPRM),

feedback fault FAIL, trip fault TRIP, electric fault FAULT, running fault OPFL. Trip fault limit can be
shielded by TRIPACK, running fault limit by OPFLACK. All the fore alarm restrictions can be
shielded by IGNORALM.

 Manual/auto selection(manual mode=5, auto made=6)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode. Auto mode
output command is decided by AUTRUN and AUTSTOP while manual mode is by MANRUN and
MANSTOP. Manual/auto selection command input adopts positive transmission check. When
startup and stop commands are inputted at the same time, system does not respond.

When interlock startup EMRUN is continuously ON, manual stop and auto stop command disable.

When interlock stop EM STOP is continuously ON, manual startup and auto startup command
disable.

When interlock startup command is inputted first and interlock stop command is inputted in
effective time of interlock startup command, respond to stop command according to parameter
REVTYPE. Otherwise, system does not respond to startup command.

The validity of manual/auto command is restricted by start/stop enable (RUNPRM/STOPRM),

feedback fault FAIL, trip fault TRIP, electrical accident FAULT, running fault OPFL. Trip fault limit
can be shielded by TRIPACK, running fault limit by OPFLACK. All the fore alarm restrictions can
be shielded by IGNORALM.

Note4: Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS, on-site, close protection, interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual
/auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, SWAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

Note5: Running Fault

IGNORALM=ON, repond to the new command no matter FAIL and OPEL alarms are existed or

283
 Function Block Reference

not.

IGNORALM=OFF, not respond to the new command if FAIL alarm exists, OPEL is limited by
OPFLACK.

Set OPFLACK=OFF, and running fault needs no comfirmation, and is not a limiting condition for
inputing new command.

Set OPFLACK=ON, and running fault needs comfirmation, and is a limiting condition for inputing
new command, valid for interlock command and manual/auto commands.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal
are received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, start up running fault alarm OPFL.

In inching mode, when the lasting time of input command is less than runtime, no running fault will
be generated.

In inching and consistent mode, when running fault OPFL occurs, restore output commands RUN,
STOP.

In lock mode, when status feedback is not ignored and running fault OPFL occurs, restore output
commands RUN, STOP. Otherwise (IGNORSTA=ON), do not judge running fault and RUN, STOP
are completely output according to set OUTTYPE mode.

When there is OPFL alarm, if new command is effective, eliminate OPFL alarm.

Note6: Trip Alarm

When equipment is in running status and there is no effective stop command, run status feedback
disappears, and trip alarm TRIP is generated.

In lock mode, when status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored and there is error still after
runtime reaches after trip alarm, restore and output RUN and RUNFLAG.

In lock mode, when status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, trip alarm does not influence
output RUN and RUNFLAG.

When there is TRIP alarm, if new command is effective, eliminate TRIP alarm.

284
 Function Block Reference

3.9.2 Panel Parameter Instruction

Table 3-17 MOTOR Parameter Instruction

Panel Function Block

Initial Value
Parameter Parameter Application Instruction
Value Range
Name Name
Read only, OUTTYPE=0, Set in the parameter
Pulse OUTTYPE √ －
Properties.
OUT
TYP Pulse Read only, OUTTYPE=1, Set in the parameter
OUTTYPE － －
E Serial Properties.
Continuo Read only, OUTTYPE=2, Set in the parameter
OUTTYPE － －
us Properties.
Read only, SETTYPT=0, Set in the parameter
Inching SETTYPE － －
Properties.
SET
TYP Continuo Read only, SETTYPE=1, Set in the parameter
SETTYPE √ －
E us Properties.
Read only, SETTYPE=2, Set in the parameter
Lock SETTYPE － －
Properties.
When single pulse and pulse list are output,
TPW(s) TPW 5.000 ≥0
define the width of high level of output pulse.
When the command is output and
corresponding output feedback after TOC
TOC(s) TOC 20.000 ≥0 time, operation fault OPFL appears. (When
status feedback is ignored, IGNORSTA=ON,
operation fault does not appear.)
Read only, Pulse period defined when pulse
TPLS(s) TPLS 10.000 －
list is output.
Read only, 0=In the process of operating
Respond REVTYPE √ － output, system does not respond to negative
REV stop command.
TYP
E Read only, 1=In the process of operating
Not
REVTYPE － － output, system responds to negative stop
Respond
command and output stop command.

285
 Function Block Reference

Panel Function Block

Initial Value
Parameter Parameter Application Instruction
Value Range
Name Name
Out Button is
RUN RUNPRM － Start Command Enable Signal
put pressed.
Ena Button is
ble STOP STOPPRM － Stop Command Enable Signal
pressed.

TW Read only, Interval of Button Pop-Up, Set in

Time(s) TWAIT 1.000 ≥0
AIT the parameter Properties.

SW Read only, FBOPT=OFF, Set in the parameter

Panel FBOPT √ ON/OFF
AM Properties.
Setti Read only, FBOPT=ON, Set in the parameter
ngs Program FBOPT － ON/OFF
Properties.

Ope RUN MANRUN － － MAN Startup Command

ratio
n STOP MANSTOP － － MAN Stop Command
Butt
on
ACK ACK － － Acknowledgement Signal

3.9.3 Flag
Table 3-18 Flag list

Flag Code Supervision Assign Description

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable No The Spot (LOC)
D2 Disable Protection (PROTECT)
D3 Disable Interlock Start (EMRUNSTA)
D4 Disable Interlock Stop (EMSTPSTA)
D5 Disable Manual (MAN)
D6 Enable (SWAM) Automatic (AUTO)
D7 Disable Turn-Off Alarm (POWOFF)
D8 Disable Electrical Accident (FAULT)
D9 Disable Running Fault (OPFL)
D10 Disable Feedback Fault (FAIL)
D11 Disable Running Status of Device (STARUN)
D12 Disable Stop Status of Device (STASTOP)
D13 Disable Device Trip (TRIP)
D14 Disable Run Instruction Output Process (RUNPRO)
D15 Disable Stop Instruction Output Process (STOPRO)
D16 Disable Indicate Startup Condition of Interlock (EMRUNCON)
D17 Disable Indicate Stop Condition of Interlock (EMSTPCON)
D18 Enable (AOF) Alarm Suppression (AOF)
D19 Enable (SWFIX Listing (FIX)
D20 Enable (RUNPRM) Indication of Startup Enable (RUNPRM)
D21 Enable (STOPRM) Indication of Stop Enable (STOPRM)
D24 Disable Interlock instruction conflict (DBEMCMD)
NONE Enable (MANRUN) Manual Startup (MANRUN)
NONE Enable (MANSTOP) Manual Stop (MANSTOP)
NONE Enable (ACK) Confirm (ACK)

286
 Function Block Reference

3.9.4 Example Application

To achieve the field-pump start and stop control as shown in Figure 3-17, and can be operated on
flow chart. When pump running fault (if after running time, the status feedback and control output
are different, open the running fault alarm) occurs, no need to acknowledge. When pump trip
occurs, acknowledge first and execute other operation.

Dual-DI dual-DO pump refers to that the start and stop of filed pump device is controlled by two
DO signals, the pump status is shown by dual-DI signal feedbacks. It is often used to control start
and stop of high power pump.

Figure 3-17 Dual-DI Dual-DO Pump

Details of program are shown below. It applies MOTOR motor control function block, and the
upper computer interface can control DO via function block tag.

Figure 3-18 Program of Dual-DI Dual-DO Motor

Function block and example instructions are shown in the table below:

Table 3-19 Function Block and Example Instruction

NO. Example Type Instruction Remark

Pump Running Status Can perform 2 DI
001 RL_M1101A3 DI Input
Feedback construction
002 HS_M1101A1 DO Output Pump Start Control

003 HS_M1101A2 DO Output Pump Stop Control

Pump Control Function
004 M1101A1_CON Function Block Tag Supervision Tag
Block Tag

Parameter settings of MOTOR:

287
 Function Block Reference

 FBOPT: ON
 PSWAM: OFF
 OPFLACK: OFF
 AUTOCLR: ON
 TRIPACK: ON
 IGNORSTA: OFF
 If pulse control is required, in configuration parameter OUTTYPE=0, SETTYPE=1,
REVTYPE=1 and STPOUT=OFF;
 If long signal control is required, in configuration parameter OUTTYPE=2,
SETTYPE=1, REVTYPE=1, STPOUT=OFF; when long signal control is applied and
running time has reached, no matter the feedback arrives or not, output is OFF.

Note: the settings of FBOPT and PSWAM can avoid wrong operation for Auto button the panel.
Other settings should be applied for auto control.

Alarm Settings:

 FAIL(Device Fault) alarm, when all function block switches are ON, FAIL outputs
alarm (FAIL=ON);
 OPFL (running fault) alarm, when the status feedback of function block is different
with its output, OPFL outputs alarm (OPFL=ON);
 TRIP(trip indication) alarm, if there is no stop output action, the open feedback
changes from ON to OFF, TRIP outputs alarm (TRIP=ON);
 Set the operation parameter IGNORALM (input shield alarm) of basic parameter as
not shield (IGNORALM=OFF), the input instruction is not influenced by alarm signals
FAIL and OPFL.
Note: whether to acknowledge fault is determined by the settings of operation parameter
OPFLACK. When IGNORSTA=ON, OPFL does not output alarm.

3.10 Valve Control Function Block (VALVE)

VALVE function block enables control and interlock protect to a single equipment by last level
sequence control command or operator by panel.

VALVE function block is complex function block, and its running time is 20µs.

288
 Function Block Reference

3.10.1 Parameter Instruction

Table 3-20 Valve control function block parameter instruction

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference

Basic Mode Output Instruction Mode

Configuratio
Parameters Setting OUTTYPE 0=Pulse, 1=Pulse Series, － －
n Parameter
2=Long-Signal
Mode: 0= Inching, Configuratio
SETTYPE － －
1=Continuum n Parameter
Answer Mode of Reverse
Instruction: Configuratio
REVTYPE － －
0=No Answer, 1=Answer and n Parameter
Output, 2=Answer And Stop
Output Instruction of STOP:
When STPOUT=OFF, stop
command only represents the
logical stop, it is not output to
Operation
STPOUT the equipment. TRUE －
Parameter
When STPOUT=ON, stop
command represents the
logical stop and is output with
TPW pulse width.
Whether to Confirm Running
Fault:
Set OPFLACK=OFF, running
fault does not need to be
confirmed and is not
considered as restricted
condition of new command
input. Operation
OPFLACK TRUE －
Set OPFLACK=ON, running Parameter
fault needs to be confirmed
and is considered as
restricted condition of new
command input and is
effective to interlock
command and manual/auto
command.

289
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Whether Auto-Remove
Running Fault:
Set AUTOCLR=ON, running
fault alarm OPFL will be
eliminated automatically after
status feedback signal is Operation
AUTOCLR TRUE －
restored. Parameter
Set AUTOCLR=OFF, running
fault alarm OPFL will be
eliminated only after panel
confirmation after status
feedback signal is restored.
Whether to Confirm Trip Fault:
When TRIPACK=OFF, then
the trip fault do not need to be
confirmed and do not use as
input condition of new
command. Operation
TRIPACK TRUE －
When TRIPACK＝ON, then Parameter
the trip fault:
need to be confirmed
use as input condition of new
interlock command and
Man/auto command.
Input Command Shield Alarm.
When IGNORALM=ON, then
FAIL, TRIP, FAULT, OPFL will
not use as input condition of
IGNORAL new command. Operation
TRUE －
M When IGNORALM=OFF, then Parameter
FAIL, TRIP, FAULT, OPFL will
use as input condition of new
interlock command and
Man/auto command.
Ignore Feedback That Output
Instruction.
When status feedback is
ignored and IGNORSTA=ON,
an OPN command or CLS
command will output
depending on OUTTYPE Operation
IGNORSTA TRUE －
setting. Parameter
When status feedback is not
ignored and
IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore
outputs command when
corresponding status
feedback reaches.
Time Output pulse width. When
Setting single pulse and pulse list are Operation
TPW TRUE －
s output, define the width of Parameter
high-level of output pulse.

290
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Devise Travel Time (Unit: S)
When the command is output
and corresponding output
feedback after TOC time,
Operation
TOC operation fault OPFL appears. TRUE －
Parameter
(When status feedback is
ignored, IGNORSTA=ON,
operation fault does not
appear.)
Output Pulse Cycle (Unit: S)
Pulse period defined when Operation
TPLS TRUE －
pulse list is output. When set Parameter
TPLS<TPW, TPLS=TPW.
Setting Interval of Button Operation
TWAIT TRUE －
Pop-Up (Unit: S) Parameter
Extended Input Measuring
OPNSTA Open Bit Feedback － Input Pin
Parameters pin Point DI
Measuring
CLSSTA Close Bit Feedback － Input Pin
Point DI
Upstream
AUTOPN Auto-Open Command － Input Pin
Output
Upstream
AUTCLS Auto-Close Command － Input Pin
Output
Upstream
AUTSTOP Auto-Stop Command － Input Pin
Output
Upstream
EMOPN Interlock Open Command － Input Pin Interlock
Signal
Upstream
EMCLS Interlock Close Command － Input Pin Interlock
Signal
Upstream
PROTECT Protect － Input Pin
Output
Control Switch with on The Upstream
TOLOC － Input Pin
Spot (ON=on the Spot) Output
Confirm Signal of Program
Input
Upstream
PACK Eliminate the running alarm or － Input Pin
Output
trip alarm by panel or program
input signal PACK.
Open-Output Enable Signal
Open permitted signal. When
OPNPRM=ON, interlock Upstream
OPNPRM － Input Pin
open, auto open and manual Output
open can output open
command.
Close- Output Enable Signal
Close permitted command.
When CLSPRM=ON, interlock Upstream
CLSPRM － Input Pin
close, auto close and manual Output
close can output close
command.
Control Switch Input of Upstream
PSWAM － Input Pin
Software Man/Auto Output

291
 Function Block Reference

Application
Name Description Upload Properties
Reference
Select Man/Auto Control
Upstream
FBOPT Source － Input Pin
Output
(OFF=Panel Control)
OPN Output the Open Instruction － Output Pin Output DO
Output
pin CLS Output the Close Instruction － Output Pin Output DO
STOP Output the Stop Instruction － Output Pin Output DO
Operation
SWFIX Command of Listing － －
Parameter
Operation
MANOPN Manual Open Command － －
Parameter
Operation
MANCLS Manual Close Command － －
Operati Parameter
on pin Operation
MANSTOP Manual Stop Command － －
Parameter
Man/Auto Switch: Operation
SWAM － －
ON=Auto, OFF=Man Parameter
Operation
ACK Confirm Signal － －
Parameter
Device Fault
When open status feedback
Monitoring
FAIL OPNSTA and close status － －
Parameter
feedback CLSSTA are both
ON, feedback fault FAIL=ON.
Monitoring
OPFL Running Fault (ON=Fault) － －
Parameter
Monitoring
TRIP Trip Indication (ON=Trip) － －
Parameter
Monitoring
LOC Indication of Device Open All － －
Parameter
Monitoring
STAOPN Indication of Device Close All － －
Status Parameter
Indication of Device Stop in Monitoring
STACLS － －
the Middle Parameter
Monitoring
STASTOP Device Mode (Observe) － －
Parameter
Monitoring
MODE Running Fault (ON=Fault) － －
Parameter
Output Process of Monitoring
OPNFLAG － －
Open-Command (Observe) Parameter
Output Process of Monitoring
CLSFLAG － －
Close-Command (Observe) Parameter
STOPFLA Output Process of Monitoring
－ －
G Stop-Command (Observe) Parameter
Alarm Operation
AOF Suppress Module Alarm TRUE －
Enable Parameter
d and
Suppre FLAG Flag Code － Output Pin －
ss
OOS
with OOS Status Operation
Setting SWOOS TRUE －
(ON=Prohibited) Parameter
s

292
 Function Block Reference

3.10.2 Logic Time Sequencing

1) SETTYPE: Run mode

0= inching mode

 The output command will restore with input command.

 When status feedback is not ignored and IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore outputs
command when corresponding status feedback reaches.

 When status feedback is ignored and IGNORSTA=ON, the status feedback does not
influence the command output.

1=consistent mode

 Input command jumps and checks and has memory. Output command will not restore
with input command.

 When status feedback is not ignored and IGNORSTA=OFF, the restore outputs
command when corresponding status feedback reaches.

 When status feedback is ignored and IGNORSTA=ON, the status feedback does not
influence the command output.

2) OUTTYPE: output mode selection

Figure 3-19 Pulse Output Mode (OUTTYPE = 0)

Figure 3-20 Pulse Train Output Mode (OUTTYPE = 1 )

Figure 3-21Long Signal Output Mode( OUTTYPE = 2 )

3) Work Status

Function block status and priority: OOS>on-site> close protection >interlock>manual /auto
selection

293
 Function Block Reference

 OOS(MODE=1)

When SWOOS=ON, function block is in OOS status and does not respond to command output.
The output maintains.

 On-site(MODE=2)

When function block is not in OOS status and TOLOC=ON, function block is in on-site mode.
Output command restores and is not available. Function block is not restricted by switch.

 Close protection (MODE=3)

When function block is not in OOS status or on-site status, input close protection commands,
function block turns to close protection mode. Close protection mode is not restricted by switch or
feedback signal or alarm.

When Input Pin PROTECT jumps from OFF to ON, the trigger one stops command output.

 Interlock(MODE=4)

When function block is not in OOS status or on-site status, input interlock open or interlock close
command, function block turns to interlock mode. Interlock command input adopts positive
transmission check.

When both interlock open, interlock stop commands are inputted, the system does not respond
interlock command, and will generate DBEMCMD alarm.

When interlock open command is inputted first and interlock stop command is inputted in effective
time of interlock open command, execute interlock open command first and then interlock stop
command after interlock open command is over. And vise versa.

The effective of interlock command is restricted by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM),

feedback fault FAIL, trip fault TRIP, electric fault FAULT, running fault OPFL. Trip fault limit can be
shielded by TRIPACK, running fault limit by OPFLACK. All the fore alarm restrictions can be
shielded by IGNORALM.

 Manual stop (MODE=5)

Precedence level of manual stop is more than auto-open, auto-close, auto-stop, manual open and
manual close.

If interlock command EMOPN or EMCLS is ON, then manual stop command disables.

 Man/auto (Man: MODE=6; Auto: MODE=7)

When function block is not in all statuses above, it is in manual /auto selection mode. Automatic
status instruction includes AUTOPN, AUTCLS, and AUTSTOP. Manual status output instruction

294
 Function Block Reference

includes MANOPN, MANCLS.

Man/auto command input adopts up-jump check.

If interlock open EMOPN hold is continuously ON, then manual close and auto close command
disables.

If interlock-close EMCLS hold is continuously ON, then manual open and auto open command
disables.

The validity of Man/auto command is limited by open/close enable (OPNPRM, CLSPRM),

feedback fault, trip fault, running fault. Trip fault limit can be shielded by TRIPACK; running fault
limit can be shielded by OPFLACK. At one time, above 3 alarms limit can be shielded by
IGNORALM.

4) Manual/Auto Switch

When OOS, on-site, close protection, interlock are not generated, the system turns to manual
/auto mode.

It can be switched by FBOPT, WAM and PSWAM.

When FBOPT=OFF, it is decided by panel.

When FBOPT=ON, it is decided by program input PSWAM.

5) Running Fault

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=ON is ignored, there is no running fault.

When the status feedback IGNORSTA=OFF is not ignored, and no responding feedback signal
are received in runtime TOC after outputting the command, start up running fault alarm OPFL.

In inching mode, when the lasting time of input command is less than runtime, no running fault will
be generated.

In inching and consistent mode, when running fault OPFL occurs, restore output commands RUN,
STOP.

When there is OPFL alarm, if new command is effective, eliminate OPFL alarm.

Trip Alarm

When there is no open command, generate TRIP when open feedback reaches or close feedback
undoes.

When there is no close command, generate TRIP when close feedback reaches or open feedback

295
 Function Block Reference

undoes.

When there is TRIP alarm, then new command is valid and the input of new command will
eliminate TRIP alarm.

3.10.3 Panel Parameter Instruction

Figure 3-1 Panel Parameter Instruction

Function
Panel Parameter Block Initial Value
Application Instruction
Name Parameter Value Range
Name
Read only, OUTTYPE=0, Set in the
Pulse OUTTYPE √ －
parameter Properties.
OUT
TYP Pulse Read only, OUTTYPE=1, Set in the
OUTTYPE － －
E Serial parameter Properties.
Read only, OUTTYPE=2, Set in the
Continuous OUTTYPE － －
parameter Properties.
Run Read only, SETTYPT=0, Set in the
Inching SETTYPE － －
ning parameter Properties.
Mod Read only, SETTYPE=1, Set in the
e Continuous SETTYPE √ －
parameter Properties.
0=In the process of operating output,
Not
REVTYPE － － system does not respond to negative stop
Response
REV command.
TYP 1=In the process of operating output,
E Output REVTYPE √ － system responds to negative stop command
Mod and output negative stop command.
e
2=In the process of operating output,
Stop REVTYPE － － system responds to negative stop command
and is considered as stop command.

296
 Function Block Reference

Function
Panel Parameter Block Initial Value
Application Instruction
Name Parameter Value Range
Name
When single pulse and pulse list are output,
TPW(s) TPW 5.000 ≥0 define the width of high-level of output
pulse.
When the command is output and
corresponding output feedback after TOC
time, operation fault OPFL appears. (When
TOC(s) TOC 20.000 ≥0
status feedback is ignored,
IGNORSTA=ON, operation fault does not
appear.)
Read only, Pulse period defined when pulse
TPLS(s) TPLS 10.000 － list is output. When set TPLS<TPW,
TPLS=TPW.
The
Out OPNPRM RUNPRM button is － Start Command Enable Signal
put pressed.
Per
miss The
ion CLSPRM STOPPRM button is － Stop Command Enable Signal
pressed.
The
button is The button pressed means STPOUT=ON,
STP Enable STPOUT －
not and stop command is output.
OUT pressed.
Setti
ngs The
The button pressed means STPOUT=OF
Disable STPOUT button is －
and stop command will not be output.
pressed.
TW
AIT Read only, Setting Interval of Button
TWAIT(s) TWAIT 1.000 ≥0
Setti Pop-Up, Set in the parameter Properties.
ng
Man Read only, FBOPT=OFF, Set in the
Panel FBOPT √ －
ual/ parameter Properties.
Auto
_CS Read only, FBOPT=ON, Set in the
swit Program FBOPT － －
parameter Properties.
ch
OPN MANOPN － － Manual Open Command
Ope
CLS MANCLS － － Manual Close Command
ratio
n
Butt STP MANSTOP － － Manual Stop Command
on
ACK ACK － － Confirm Signal

3.10.4 Flag
Table 3-21 Flag list

Flag Code Supervision Assign Instruction

D0 Enable (SWOOS) Tag Disable (OOS)
D1 Disable On The Spot (LOC)
D2 Disable Protect (PROTECT)
D3 Disable Interlock Open (EMOPNSTA)
D4 Disable Interlock-Close (EMCLSSTA)